Installation Manual

Pure IP-PBX

Model No. KX-TDE100

KX-TDE200

Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic Pure IP-PBX.

Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.
SD Logo is
KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: PMMPR Software File Version 2.0100 or later a trademark.
System Components

System Components
System Components Table
Category Model No. Description

Shelves KX-TDE100 Basic Shelf

KX-TDE200 Basic Shelf
Main Processing Card IP Convergence Main Processing Card (IPCMPR)
IPCMPR Option Cards KX-TDE0110 16-Channel VoIP DSP Card (DSP16)
KX-TDE0111 64-Channel VoIP DSP Card (DSP64)
KX-TDA0196 Remote Card (RMT)
Activation Key Codes KX-NCS4102 2-Channel IP Trunk Activation Key (2 IP Trunk)
KX-NCS4104 4-Channel IP Trunk Activation Key (4 IP Trunk)
KX-NCS4201 1-Channel IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone
Activation Key (1 IP Softphone/IP PT)
KX-NCS4204 4-Channel IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone
Activation Key (4 IP Softphone/IP PT)
KX-NCS4208 8-Channel IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone
Activation Key (8 IP Softphone/IP PT)
KX-NCS4216 16-Channel IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone
Activation Key (16 IP Softphone/IP PT)
KX-NCS4501 1-Channel IP Proprietary Telephone Activation Key
(1 IP PT)
KX-NCS4504 4-Channel IP Proprietary Telephone Activation Key
(4 IP PT)
KX-NCS4508 8-Channel IP Proprietary Telephone Activation Key
(8 IP PT)
KX-NCS4516 16-Channel IP Proprietary Telephone Activation Key
(16 IP PT)
KX-NCS4701 1-Channel SIP Extension Activation Key
(1 SIP Extension)
KX-NCS4704 4-Channel SIP Extension Activation Key
(4 SIP Extension)
KX-NCS4708 8-Channel SIP Extension Activation Key
(8 SIP Extension)
KX-NCS4716 16-Channel SIP Extension Activation Key
(16 SIP Extension)
KX-NCS4910 Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced
Version (Software Upgrade 01)
Virtual Trunk Cards - Virtual 16-Channel VoIP Gateway Card (V-IPGW16)
- Virtual 16-Channel SIP Trunk Card (V-SIPGW16)

2 Installation Manual
 System Components

Category Model No. Description

Virtual Extension Cards - Virtual 32-Channel VoIP Extension Card (V-IPEXT32)

- Virtual 32-Channel SIP Extension Card (V-SIPEXT32)
Physical Trunk Cards KX-TDA0180 8-Port Analogue Trunk Card (LCOT8)
KX-TDA0181 16-Port Analogue Trunk Card (LCOT16)
KX-TDA0182 8-Port DID Card (DID8)
KX-TDA0183 4-Port Analogue Trunk Card (LCOT4)
KX-TDA0184 8-Port E & M Trunk Card (E&M8)
KX-TDA0187 T-1 Trunk Card (T1)
KX-TDA0188 E-1 Trunk Card (E1)
KX-TDA0189 8-Port Caller ID/Pay Tone Card (CID/PAY8)
KX-TDA0193 8-Port Caller ID Card (CID8)
KX-TDA0284 4-Port BRI Card (BRI4)
KX-TDA0288 8-Port BRI Card (BRI8)
KX-TDA0290CE PRI Card (PRI30)
KX-TDA0290CJ PRI Card (PRI30)
KX-TDA0290 PRI Card (PRI23)
KX-TDA0484 4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card (IP-GW4E)
KX-TDA0490 16-Channel VoIP Gateway Card (IP-GW16)
Physical Extension Cards KX-TDA0143 4 Cell Station Interface Card (CSIF4)
KX-TDA0144 8 Cell Station Interface Card (CSIF8)
KX-TDA0170 8-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card (DHLC8)
KX-TDA0171 8-Port Digital Extension Card (DLC8)
KX-TDA0172 16-Port Digital Extension Card (DLC16)
KX-TDA0173 8-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card (SLC8)
KX-TDA0174 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card
(SLC16)
KX-TDA0175 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension with
Message Lamp Card (MSLC16)
KX-TDA0177 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card with
Caller ID (CSLC16)
KX-TDA0470 16-Channel VoIP Extension Card (IP-EXT16)

Installation Manual 3
System Components

Category Model No. Description

Other Physical Cards KX-TDA0161 4-Port Doorphone Card (DPH4)

KX-TDA0162 2-Port Doorphone Card (German Type) (DPH2)
KX-TDA0164 4-Port External Input/Output Card (EIO4)
KX-TDA0166 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card (ECHO16)
KX-TDA0168 Extension Caller ID Card (EXT-CID)
KX-TDA0190 Optional 3-Slot Base Card (OPB3)
KX-TDA0191 4-Channel Message Card (MSG4)
KX-TDA0192 2-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card (ESVM2)
KX-TDA0194 4-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card (ESVM4)
Power Supply Units (PSUs) KX-TDA0103 L-Type Power Supply Unit (PSU-L)
KX-TDA0104 M-Type Power Supply Unit (PSU-M)
KX-TDA0108 S-Type Power Supply Unit (PSU-S)
Cell Stations 2.4 GHz KX-TDA0141 2-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a DHLC/DLC Card
(CSs) (PT-interface CS) for 2.4 GHz Portable Station
KX-TDA0142 3-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a CSIF Card for 2.4
GHz Portable Station
KX-TDA0151 2-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a DHLC/DLC Card
(PTinterface CS) for 2.4 GHz Portable Station
KX-TDA0152 3-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a CSIF Card for 2.4
GHz Portable Station
DECT KX-TDA0141CE 2-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a DHLC/DLC Card
(PT-interface CS) for DECT Portable Station
KX-TDA0142CE 4-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a CSIF Card for
DECT Portable Station
KX-TDA0158CE 8-Channel High-density Cell Station Unit Using a
DHLC/DLC Card (PT-interface CS) for DECT Portable
Station
DECT 6.0 KX-TDA0155 DECT 6.0 2-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a DHLC/
DLC Card (PT-interface CS) for DECT 6.0 Portable
Station
KX-TDA0158 DECT 6.0 8-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a DHLC/
DLC Card (PT-interface CS) for DECT 6.0 Portable
Station
Proprietary Equipment KX-A228 S/M-type Back-up Battery Cable
KX-A229 L-type Back-up Battery Cable
KX-A258 Blank Slot Cover
KX-T30865 Doorphone
KX-T7765

4 Installation Manual
 System Components

Equipment Compatibility
Compatible Panasonic Proprietary Telephones
The PBX supports the following telephones:

• IP proprietary telephones (e.g., KX-NT300 series)

• IP softphones (e.g., KX-NCS8100)
• Digital proprietary telephones (e.g., KX-DT300 series)
• Analogue proprietary telephones (e.g., KX-T7700 series)
• Portable stations (e.g., KX-TCA355, KX-TCA256, KX-TD7690)
• DSS consoles (e.g., KX-T7640)
• Single line telephones (e.g., KX-T7710)

Incompatible Panasonic Proprietary Telephones

The PBX does not support the following telephones:
• KX-T30800 series proprietary telephones and DSS consoles
• KX-T61600 series proprietary telephones and DSS consoles
• KX-T123200 series proprietary telephones and DSS consoles
• KX-TD7500 DECT portable station
Note
• For the equipment (e.g., Add-on Key Module, USB Module, Headset*1) that can be connected to a
particular telephone, refer to the telephone’s manual.
• For other equipment that can be connected to the PBX, refer to "1.2.2 System Connection Diagram".
*1
The KX-T7090 headset can be connected to the KX-T7000, KX-T7200, KX-T7300, KX-T7400, and KX-T7500 (except for
KX-T7560/KX-T7565) series telephones.

Notice
• This PBX supports SIP Extensions. However, some PBX features may not be available for SIP Extensions,
depending on your telephone type.
• Under power failure conditions, the connected telephones may not operate. Please ensure that a separate
telephone, not dependent on local power, is available for emergency use.
• Prior to connection of this product, please verify that the intended operating environment is supported.
Satisfactory performance cannot be guaranteed for the following:
– interoperability and compatibility with all devices and systems connected to this product
– proper operation and compatibility with services provided by telecommunications companies over
connected networks

Note
• Some optional service cards and features are not available for certain countries/areas. Consult your
certified Panasonic dealer for detailed instructions.
• In this manual, the suffix of each model number (e.g., KX-TDE100NE) is omitted unless necessary.

Installation Manual 5
System Components

Safety Notices
Please observe the safety notices in this manual in order to avoid danger to users or other people, and prevent
damage to property.
The notices are classified as follows, according to the severity of injury or damage:

WARNING This notice means that misuse could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION This notice means that misuse could result in injury or damage to property.

List of Abbreviations
• APT ® Analogue Proprietary Telephone
• DPT ® Digital Proprietary Telephone
• IP-PT ® IP Proprietary Telephone
• PS ® Portable Station
• PT ® Proprietary Telephone
• SIP Extension ® Session Initiation Protocol Extension (SIP hardphones/SIP softphones)
• SLT ® Single Line Telephone

6 Installation Manual
 Important Safety Instructions

Important Safety Instructions

When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk
of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
• Do not use the product near water, for example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub,
in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool.
• Avoid using wired telephones during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from
lightning.
• Do not use a telephone in the vicinity of a gas leak to report the leak.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

Installation Manual 7
Important Information

Important Information
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING

SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
For All Telephone Equipment
• Do not install the product in any other way than described in relevant manuals.
• For safety reasons, do not physically modify the product or any optional equipment.
• The product may only be installed and serviced by qualified service personnel.
• To prevent possible fire or electric shock, do not expose the product to rain or moisture.
• Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.
• Do not place the product on an unstable surface, as a fall may cause serious internal damage.
• The product should only be connected to the type of electrical power supply specified on the product label.
If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your dealer or local power company.
• For safety purposes some products are equipped with an earthed plug. If you do not have an earthed outlet,
please have one installed. Do not bypass this safety feature by tampering with the plug.
• Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate the product where the power cord may be
stepped on or tripped on.
• To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not overload wall outlets and extension cords.
• To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble the product. Only qualified personnel should
service the product. Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks.
Incorrect reassembly can cause electric shock.
• Unplug the product from the wall outlet and have it serviced by qualified service personnel in the following
cases:
a. When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed.
b. If liquid has been spilled into the product.
c. If the product has been exposed to rain or water.
d. If the product does not operate according to the operating instructions. Adjust only the controls that are
explained in the operating instructions. Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage
and may require service by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.
e. If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.
f. If product performance deteriorates.

For the PBX

• If damage to the unit exposes any internal parts, disconnect the power supply cord immediately and return
the unit to your dealer.
• Do not bundle cables that are connected to the PBX with the AC power cords of machines located
nearby.
Use protectors to prevent the cables from being stepped on. Failure to do so may cause fire or electric
shock.
• Unplug this unit from the AC outlet if it emits smoke, an abnormal smell or makes unusual noise. These
conditions can cause fire or electric shock. Confirm that smoke has stopped and contact an authorised
Panasonic Factory Service Centre.
• Danger of explosion exists if a battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent
type recommended by the battery manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.

8 Installation Manual
 Important Information

• Make sure that the wall that the shelf will be attached to is strong enough to support the shelf. If not, it is
necessary for the wall to be reinforced.
• Only use the wall mounting equipment (anchor plug, screws, metal bracket) included with the PBX.
• When driving the screws into the wall, be careful to avoid touching any metal laths, wire laths or metal
plates in the wall.
• When placing the metal bracket, make sure that the "TOP" arrow is pointing upward.
• When this product is no longer in use, make sure to detach it from the wall.
• Do not insert objects of any kind into this product through its slots and openings, as they may touch
dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Never spill
liquid of any kind on or in the product.

CAUTION

SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
For All Telephone Equipment
• Unplug the product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Wipe the product with a soft cloth. Do not clean
with abrasive powders or with chemical agents such as benzene or thinner. Do not use liquid cleaners or
aerosol cleaners.
• The product should be kept free of dust, moisture, high temperature (more than 40 °C) and vibration, and
should not be exposed to direct sunlight.

For the PBX

• When relocating the equipment, first disconnect the telecom connection before disconnecting the power
connection. When the unit is installed in the new location, reconnect the power first, and then reconnect
the telecom connection.
• The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device. Ensure that the AC outlet is located near
the equipment and is easily accessible.
• The SD Memory Card poses a choking hazard. Keep the SD Memory Card out of reach of children.
• Slots and openings in the front, back and bottom of the cabinet are provided for ventilation; to protect it
from overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked
by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface while in use. The product should never
be placed near or over a radiator or other heat source. This product should not be placed in a sealed
environment unless proper ventilation is provided.

For the Cell Station

2.4 GHz Cell Station (Except for KX-TDA0151CN)
Medical—consult the manufacturer of any personal medical devices, such as pacemakers, to determine if they
are adequately shielded from external RF (radio frequency) energy. (The unit operates in the frequency range
of 2401 MHz to 2480 MHz, and the power output level can range from 0.004 W to 0.4 W.) Do not use the unit
in health care facilities if any regulations posted in the area instruct you not to do so. Hospitals or health care
facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF (radio frequency) energy.

2.4 GHz Cell Station (Only for KX-TDA0151CN)

Medical—consult the manufacturer of any personal medical devices, such as pacemakers, to determine if they
are adequately shielded from external RF (radio frequency) energy. (The unit operates in the frequency range
of 2401 MHz to 2480 MHz, and the output peak power level is less than 0.16 W.) Do not use the unit in health
care facilities if any regulations posted in the area instruct you not to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities
may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF (radio frequency) energy.

DECT Cell Station

Installation Manual 9
Important Information

Medical—consult the manufacturer of any personal medical devices, such as pacemakers, to determine if they
are adequately shielded from external RF (radio frequency) energy. (The unit operates in the frequency range
of 1881 MHz to 1898 MHz, and the output peak power level is less than 0.25 W.) Do not use the unit in health
care facilities if any regulations posted in the area instruct you not to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities
may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF (radio frequency) energy.

DECT 6.0 Cell Station

Medical—consult the manufacturer of any personal medical devices, such as pacemakers, to determine if they
are adequately shielded from external RF (radio frequency) energy. (The unit operates in the frequency range
of 1920 MHz to 1930 MHz, and the output peak power level is less than 0.12 W.) Do not use the unit in health
care facilities if any regulations posted in the area instruct you not to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities
may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF (radio frequency) energy.

SECURITY REQUIREMENTS
In order to use the PBX safely and correctly, the Security Requirements below must be observed. Failure to
do so may result in:
• Loss, leakage, falsification or theft of user information.
• Illegal use of the PBX by a third party.
• Interference or suspension of service caused by a third party.

What is User Information?

User Information is defined as:
1. Information stored on the SD Memory Card
Phonebook data, user IDs, system settings data, passwords (User/Administrator/Installer), Personal
Identification Numbers (PINs), etc.
2. Information sent from the PBX to a PC or other external device:
Phone call data (including telephone numbers of outside parties), call charge data, etc.

Requirements
1. The SD Memory Card contains software for all the processes of the PBX and all customer data. It can be
easily removed and taken away from the PBX by a third party. Therefore, do not allow unauthorised access
to prevent data leakage.
2. Always make backups of data stored on the SD Memory Card. For details, refer to "2.6.2 Utility—File
Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)" and "2.6.3 Utility—File Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PC" in the PC
Programming Manual.
3. To prevent illegal access from the Internet, activate a Firewall.
4. To avoid unauthorised access and possible abuse of the PBX, we strongly recommend:
a. Keeping the password secret.
b. Selecting a complex, random password that cannot be easily guessed.
c. Changing your password regularly.
5. Perform the following when sending the PBX for repair or handing it over to a third party.
a. Make a backup of data stored on the SD Memory Card.
b. Using an SD formatter, format the SD Memory Card so that information cannot be retrieved from it.
6. To prevent data leakage, render the SD Memory Card physically unusable before disposal.
7. When user information is sent from the PBX to a PC or other external device, the confidentiality of that
information becomes the responsibility of the customer. Before disposing of the PC or other external device,
ensure that data cannot be retrieved from it by formatting the hard disk and/or rendering it physically
unusable.

Notice

10 Installation Manual
 Important Information

SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
For All Telephone Equipment
• Read and understand all instructions.

For the PBX

• Keep the unit away from heating appliances and devices that generate electrical noise such as fluorescent
lamps, motors and televisions. These noise sources can interfere with the performance of the PBX.
• If you are having problems making calls to outside destinations, follow this procedure to test the trunks:
a. Disconnect the PBX from all trunks.
b. Connect known working SLTs to those trunks.
c. Make a call to an external destination using those SLTs.
If a call cannot be carried out correctly, there may be a problem with the trunk that the SLT is connected
to. Contact your telephone company.
If all SLTs operate properly, there may be a problem with your PBX. Do not reconnect the PBX to the trunks
until it has been serviced by an authorised Panasonic Factory Service Centre.

Installation Manual 11
Precaution

Precaution
For users in the United Kingdom
FOR YOUR SAFETY, PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING TEXT CAREFULLY.

This appliance is supplied with a moulded three-pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 5 amp fuse
is fitted in this plug. Should the fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating
of 5 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.
Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.

If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you
lose the fuse cover, the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover
can be purchased from your local Panasonic dealer.

IF THE FITTED MOULDED PLUG IS UNSUITABLE FOR THE AC OUTLET IN YOUR PREMISES, THEN THE
FUSE SHOULD BE REMOVED AND THE PLUG CUT OFF AND DISPOSED OF SAFELY. THERE IS A
DANGER OF SEVERE ELECTRICAL SHOCK IF THE CUT-OFF PLUG IS INSERTED INTO ANY 13 AMP
SOCKET.

If a new plug is to be fitted, please observe the wiring code as shown below. If in any doubt, please consult a
qualified electrician.

WARNING
This appliance must be earthed.

IMPORTANT: The wires in the mains lead are coloured as follows:

Green-and-yellow: Earth
Blue: Neutral
Brown: Live
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings
identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows.
The wire that is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug that is marked
with the letter E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN or GREEN-AND-YELLOW.
The wire that is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal that is marked with the letter N or coloured
BLACK.
The wire that is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal that is marked with the letter L or coloured
RED.
How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse and fuse cover.

The equipment must be connected to direct extension lines, and a payphone should not be connected as an
extension.

999 and 112 can be dialled on the apparatus after accessing the Exchange line for the purpose of making
outgoing calls to the BT emergency services.

12 Installation Manual
 Precaution

During dialling, this apparatus may tinkle the bells of other telephones using the same line. This is not a fault
and we advise you not to call the Fault Repair Service.

For users in the European Union only

Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that
used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general
household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take
them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the
Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.
By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable
resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment
which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.
For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please
contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you
purchased the items.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national
legislation.
For business users in the European Union
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or
supplier for further information.
Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items,
please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.

Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):

This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies
with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved.

For users in Germany only

• Machine Noise Information Ordinance, 3rd GPSGV: The highest sound pressure level is 70 dB (A) or less
according to EN ISO 7779.
• This equipment is not for use at video display work stations according to BildscharbV.

For users in Finland, Norway and Sweden only

• This unit may only be installed in a room or space with restricted access, and equipotential bonding must
be applied. For information on earthing, refer to "3.2.5 Frame Earth Connection".

For users in New Zealand only

• This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom ‘111’ Emergency Service.
• The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted
that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement
of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance

Installation Manual 13
Precaution

that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different
make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom’s network services.
• This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for
which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances.
• Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom’s Telepermit requirements are dependent on the
equipment (PBX) associated with this modem. In order to operate within the limits for compliance with
Telecom’s Specifications, the associated PBX equipment shall be set to ensure that modem calls are
answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing.
• Using the toll services of a company other than Telecom:
If the PBX is set up to use the toll services of a company other than Telecom, the telephone numbers
dialled from the Caller Display listings within the PBX will be directed through the toll services of the other
company because the telephone numbers include the toll access digit and area code digit. A toll charge
may be incurred. Please check with the toll carrier concerned.
• APPLICABLE ONLY TO TELECOM CUSTOMERS WHO HAVE AUTOMATIC ACCESS TO OTHER
CARRIERS FOR TOLL CALLS
When calling back a number from the Caller ID list, all numbers prefixed with "0 + AREA CODE" will be
automatically forwarded to your toll carrier. This includes numbers in your local calling area. The zero +
area code should either be removed when calling back local numbers, or check with your toll carrier that
a charge will not be levied.
• All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law.
This requires that at least one party to the conversation is to be aware that it is being recorded. In addition,
the principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the
personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is used, and what is disclosed to any
other party.

For users in Australia only

• No External TRC Terminal is provided due to an Internal Link between PE and TRC.
For users in Taiwan only
• Lithium batteries can be found in the circuit boards of the main board and optional cards of the PBX.
Note
• When disposing of any of the above products, all batteries must be removed. Follow the applicable
laws, regulations, and guidelines in your country/area regarding disposal of batteries.
• When replacing a battery, use only the same battery type, or an equivalent recommended by the battery
manufacturer.

Notice
Regarding removing or replacing a battery in the circuit board, consult your dealer.

14 Installation Manual
 Introduction

Introduction
This Installation Manual is designed to serve as an overall technical reference for the Panasonic Pure IP-PBX,
KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200. It provides instructions for installing the hardware, and programming the PBX using
the Maintenance Console.

The Structure of this Manual

This manual contains the following sections:
Section 1 System Outline
Provides general information on the PBX, including the system capacity and specifications.
Section 2 Activation Key Installation
Describes information on activation keys, including how to obtain an activation key and install it in the SD
Memory Card.
Section 3 Installation
Describes the procedures to install the PBX. Detailed instructions for planning the installation site, installing
the shelves and optional service cards, and cabling of peripheral equipment are provided. Further
information on system expansion and peripheral equipment installation is included.
Section 4 Guide for the Maintenance Console
Explains the installation procedure, structure, and basic information of the Maintenance Console.
Section 5 Troubleshooting
Provides information on the PBX and telephone troubleshooting.

About the Other Manuals

Along with this Installation Manual, the following manuals are available:
Feature Guide
Describes all basic, optional and programmable features of the PBX.
PC Programming Manual
Provides step-by-step instructions for performing system programming using a PC.
PT Programming Manual
Provides step-by-step instructions for performing system programming using a PT.
User Manual
Provides operating instructions for end users using a PT, SLT, PS, or DSS Console.

About the software version of your PBX

The contents of this manual apply to PBXs with a certain software version, as indicated on the cover of this
manual. To confirm the software version of your PBX, see "How do I confirm the software version of the PBX
or installed cards?" in 2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) of the PC Programming Manual, or "[190]
Main Processing (MPR) Software Version Reference" in the PT Programming Manual.

Trademarks
• The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
Panasonic Corporation is under licence.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.
• Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.

Installation Manual 15
Table of Contents

Table of Contents
1 System Outline .......................................................................................19
1.1 System Highlights ...........................................................................................................20
1.1.1 System Highlights ...........................................................................................................20
1.2 Basic System Construction ...........................................................................................23
1.2.1 Basic Shelf .....................................................................................................................23
1.2.2 System Connection Diagram ..........................................................................................24
1.3 Optional Equipment ........................................................................................................26
1.3.1 Optional Equipment ........................................................................................................26
1.4 Specifications ..................................................................................................................29
1.4.1 General Description ........................................................................................................29
1.4.2 Characteristics ................................................................................................................31
1.4.3 System Capacity ............................................................................................................32
2 Activation Key Installation ....................................................................41
2.1 Information about the Activation Keys .........................................................................42
2.1.1 Activation Keys ...............................................................................................................42
2.1.2 Activation Key Code and Key Management System ......................................................45
2.1.3 Activation Key File ..........................................................................................................47
3 Installation ..............................................................................................49
3.1 Before Installation ...........................................................................................................50
3.1.1 Before Installation ...........................................................................................................50
3.2 Installation of the PBX ....................................................................................................52
3.2.1 Unpacking ......................................................................................................................52
3.2.2 Names and Locations .....................................................................................................53
3.2.3 Opening/Closing the Front Cover ...................................................................................54
3.2.4 Installing/Replacing the Power Supply Unit ....................................................................56
3.2.5 Frame Earth Connection ................................................................................................60
3.2.6 Backup Battery Connection ............................................................................................61
3.2.7 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards ............................................................63
3.2.8 Types of Connectors ......................................................................................................68
3.2.9 Attaching a Ferrite Core .................................................................................................70
3.2.10 Fastening an Amphenol Connector ................................................................................73
3.2.11 Wall Mounting (KX-TDE200) ..........................................................................................75
3.2.12 Wall Mounting (KX-TDE100) ..........................................................................................77
3.2.13 Floor Standing (KX-TDE200 Only) .................................................................................79
3.2.14 Surge Protector Installation ............................................................................................81
3.3 Information about the Main Processing Card ..............................................................84
3.3.1 IPCMPR Card .................................................................................................................84
3.3.2 DSP16 Card (KX-TDE0110) and DSP64 Card (KX-TDE0111) ......................................87
3.3.3 RMT Card (KX-TDA0196) ..............................................................................................89
3.4 Information about the Virtual Cards ..............................................................................90
3.4.1 Virtual Cards ...................................................................................................................90
3.5 Information about the Physical Trunk Cards ...............................................................91
3.5.1 LCOT4 Card (KX-TDA0183), LCOT8 Card (KX-TDA0180), and LCOT16 Card
(KX-TDA0181) ................................................................................................................91
3.5.2 DID8 Card (KX-TDA0182) ..............................................................................................93
3.5.3 CID/PAY8 Card (KX-TDA0189) ......................................................................................95
3.5.4 CID8 Card (KX-TDA0193) ..............................................................................................96
3.5.5 E&M8 Card (KX-TDA0184) ............................................................................................97
3.5.6 T1 Card (KX-TDA0187) ..................................................................................................99
3.5.7 E1 Card (KX-TDA0188) ................................................................................................102

16 Installation Manual
 Table of Contents

3.5.8 BRI4 Card (KX-TDA0284) and BRI8 Card (KX-TDA0288) ...........................................105

3.5.9 PRI30 Card (KX-TDA0290CE/KX-TDA0290CJ) ..........................................................109
3.5.10 PRI23 Card (KX-TDA0290) ..........................................................................................112
3.5.11 IP-GW4E Card (KX-TDA0484) .....................................................................................115
3.5.12 IP-GW16 Card (KX-TDA0490) .....................................................................................117
3.6 Information about the Physical Extension Cards ......................................................119
3.6.1 CSIF4 Card (KX-TDA0143) and CSIF8 Card (KX-TDA0144) ......................................119
3.6.2 DHLC8 Card (KX-TDA0170) ........................................................................................121
3.6.3 DLC8 Card (KX-TDA0171) ...........................................................................................123
3.6.4 DLC16 Card (KX-TDA0172) .........................................................................................125
3.6.5 SLC8 Card (KX-TDA0173) ...........................................................................................127
3.6.6 EXT-CID Card (KX-TDA0168) ......................................................................................129
3.6.7 SLC16 Card (KX-TDA0174), MSLC16 Card (KX-TDA0175), and CSLC16 Card
(KX-TDA0177) ..............................................................................................................130
3.6.8 IP-EXT16 Card (KX-TDA0470) ....................................................................................132
3.7 Information about the Other Physical Cards ..............................................................134
3.7.1 OPB3 Card (KX-TDA0190) ..........................................................................................134
3.7.2 DPH4 Card (KX-TDA0161) ..........................................................................................135
3.7.3 DPH2 Card (KX-TDA0162) ..........................................................................................137
3.7.4 EIO4 Card (KX-TDA0164) ............................................................................................140
3.7.5 ECHO16 Card (KX-TDA0166) ......................................................................................143
3.7.6 MSG4 Card (KX-TDA0191) ..........................................................................................144
3.7.7 ESVM2 Card (KX-TDA0192) and ESVM4 Card (KX-TDA0194) ..................................145
3.8 Connection of Extensions ............................................................................................146
3.8.1 Maximum Cabling Distances of the Extension Wiring (Twisted Cable) ........................146
3.8.2 Parallel Connection of the Extensions ..........................................................................148
3.8.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection .....................................................151
3.8.4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection .......................................................................158
3.9 Connection of DECT Portable Stations .......................................................................159
3.9.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................159
3.9.2 Procedure Overview .....................................................................................................161
3.9.3 Site Planning ................................................................................................................163
3.9.4 Before Site Survey .......................................................................................................167
3.9.5 Site Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355/KX-TD7590 ..................173
3.9.6 After Site Survey ..........................................................................................................177
3.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX ...........................................................................178
3.9.8 Wall Mounting ...............................................................................................................187
3.10 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations ...................................................................191
3.10.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................191
3.10.2 Procedure Overview .....................................................................................................193
3.10.3 Site Planning ................................................................................................................195
3.10.4 Before Site Survey .......................................................................................................199
3.10.5 Site Survey ...................................................................................................................203
3.10.6 After Site Survey ..........................................................................................................207
3.10.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX ...........................................................................208
3.10.8 Wall Mounting ...............................................................................................................216
3.11 Connection of DECT 6.0 Portable Stations .................................................................221
3.11.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................221
3.11.2 Procedure Overview .....................................................................................................223
3.11.3 Site Planning ................................................................................................................225
3.11.4 Before Site Survey .......................................................................................................229
3.11.5 Site Survey ...................................................................................................................234
3.11.6 After Site Survey ..........................................................................................................238
3.11.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX ...........................................................................239
3.11.8 Wall Mounting ...............................................................................................................245

Installation Manual 17
Table of Contents

3.12 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External

Relays .............................................................................................................................248
3.12.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External
Relays ..........................................................................................................................248
3.13 Connection of Peripherals ...........................................................................................251
3.13.1 Connection of Peripherals ............................................................................................251
3.14 LAN Connection ............................................................................................................255
3.14.1 LAN Connection ...........................................................................................................255
3.15 Power Failure Connections ..........................................................................................256
3.15.1 Power Failure Connections ..........................................................................................256
3.16 Starting the PBX ............................................................................................................260
3.16.1 Starting the PBX ...........................................................................................................260
4 Guide for the Maintenance Console ...................................................263
4.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................264
4.1.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................264
4.2 PC Connection ..............................................................................................................265
4.2.1 PC Connection .............................................................................................................265
4.3 Installation of the Maintenance Console ....................................................................268
4.3.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console .........................................................268
5 Troubleshooting ...................................................................................271
5.1 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................272
5.1.1 Installation ....................................................................................................................272
5.1.2 Connection ...................................................................................................................275
5.1.3 Operation ......................................................................................................................277
5.1.4 Using the Reset Button ................................................................................................280
5.1.5 Troubleshooting by Error Log .......................................................................................281
6 Appendix ...............................................................................................283
6.1 Revision History ............................................................................................................284
6.1.1 PMMPR Software File Version 2.0xxx .........................................................................284
6.1.2 PMMPR Software File Version 2.01xx .........................................................................285
Index............................................................................................................287

18 Installation Manual
 Section 1
System Outline

This section provides general information on the PBX,

including the system capacity and specifications.

Installation Manual 19
1.1.1 System Highlights

1.1 System Highlights

1.1.1 System Highlights

IPCMPR Card Features
The IPCMPR card (the preinstalled Main Processing card) includes the following features and resources:
VoIP Trunks/VoIP Extensions
The IPCMPR card allows the use of IP trunks (H.323/SIP) and IP telephones (IP-PTs, IP softphones, and
SIP Extensions). By connecting a DSP card to the IPCMPR card, these IP trunks and extensions can be
used. It is also possible to increase the number of IP trunks (max. 32) and extensions (max. 128) through
the purchase of activation key codes.
LAN Connection
The IPCMPR card is equipped with a LAN port allowing for the PBX to be connected to a LAN.
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Features
Connecting a PC to a DPT, or connecting a CTI Server to this PBX, allows functions of the PC, PBX and
extensions to be integrated. For example, detailed caller information can be taken from a database and
displayed on the PC as a call arrives, or the PC can dial numbers for the extension automatically.
Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) Features
The IPCMPR card comes preinstalled with the SVM feature (2 channels), allowing for simple answering
machine services to be supported.

Internet Protocol (IP) Telephone Features

This PBX supports the following telephone features that use IP:
IP-PT Features
This PBX supports the connection of IP-PTs which function almost identically to normal PTs. However,
they connect to the PBX over a LAN and make and receive calls using IP. In addition, KX-NT300 series
IP-PTs support the following features:
– Self Labelling (KX-NT366 only)
The LCDs featured next to the 12 flexible buttons of the KX-NT366 can be programmed to display
information regarding the setting of the corresponding flexible button. In addition, the flexible buttons
can be organised into 4 "pages" allowing you to assign a total of 4 items to each physical button.
– Optional Modules
• KX-NT307(PSLP1528) Bluetooth® Module:
Allows for a Bluetooth wireless headset to be connected to a KX-NT300 series IP-PT.
• KX-NT303 Add-on 12 Key Module:
Allows for 12 additional flexible buttons to be connected to a KX-NT346 or KX-NT343.
• KX-NT305 Add-on 60 Key Module:
Allows for 60 additional flexible buttons to be connected to a KX-NT346 or KX-NT343.
– High Sound Quality
Calls between KX-NT300 series IP-PTs support G.722 CODEC allowing for high sound quality
conversations.
SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extensions
This PBX supports the connection of third party SIP supported IP telephones (hardphones and softphones).
SIP Extensions make and receive calls using IP.
IP Softphones
This PBX supports the connection of Panasonic IP softphones, providing IP-PT operations and features
using software on a PC.

20 Installation Manual
 1.1.1 System Highlights

Internet Protocol (IP) Related Features

Server Connection
This PBX supports the connection to the following servers, allowing for enhanced efficiency and record
keeping:
– SNMP Server:
Allows for users assigned as SNMP managers to manage and receive PBX system status information,
such as local alarm information and general system activity using Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP).
– SNTP Server:
Allows for the PBX to automatically receive and update the time setting using Simple Network Time
Protocol (SNTP).
– DHCP Server:
Allows for this PBX to receive IP addresses from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
server.
Peer-to-peer Connection
Intercom calls can be made between peer-to-peer compatible IP extensions allowing for communication
without using the PBX’s VoIP resources.

Networking Features
This PBX supports the following networking features:
Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network
The PBX can connect to another PBX via a private IP network. In this case, voice signals are converted
into IP packets and sent through this network. Automatic rerouting of VoIP calls to public trunks is also
available, in case of network difficulties.
TIE Line Service
A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs, which provides cost
effective communications between company members at different locations.
Virtual Private Network (VPN)
VPN is a service provided by the VPN service provider. It uses an existing public line as if it were a private
line.
QSIG Network
QSIG is a protocol based on ISDN (Q.931) and offers enhanced PBX features in a private network of two
or more connected PBXs.

External Device Support

The following are just a few of the many useful optional devices available to enhance your telephony system:
Portable Station (PS) Features
PSs can be connected to this PBX. It is possible to use the PBX features using the PS like a PT. This PBX
supports basic CSs (allows up to 4 PSs to be on a call simultaneously) as well as high-density CSs (allows
up to 8 PSs to be on a call simultaneously). A PS can also be used in parallel with a wired telephone
(Wireless XDP Parallel Mode). In this case, the wired telephone is the main telephone and the PS is the
sub telephone.
Cellular Phone Features (KX-NCS4910 required)
This PBX supports the use of cellular phones destinations with the PBX. In combination with the use of
certain features such as Virtual PS, DISA, and XDP Parallel mode, cellular phones can make and receive
calls as if they were registered extensions.
Phone Assistant (PA) Pro Series
This PBX supports Phone Assistant Pro Series applications, a collection of highly-intuitive CTI applications
that allow you to use your PC to access a variety of PBX features conveniently and efficiently. PA Pro

Installation Manual 21
1.1.1 System Highlights

series applications combine the efficiency and user-friendliness of CTI applications with the convenience
of server-based applications, allowing User IDs, passwords and PBX settings to be configured over a web
browser.
Voice Mail Features
This PBX supports Voice Processing Systems (VPS) with DTMF Integration as well as DPT (Digital)
Integration, connected locally and over a network.
ACD Report Server (KX-NCV200)
This PBX supports VPSs with an ACD Report Server. In addition to VPS features, the ACD Report Server
provides you with a variety of features, such as monitoring, reporting, call logging features and creating
performance graphs, to manage call information efficiently.

Other Useful Features

Easy Installation and Setup
– With Physical Cards
By simply connecting telephones and outside lines to analogue extension and trunk cards, you can
make and receive calls. For digital trunks (e.g., E1, T1, etc.), it may be necessary to first make the
required settings and restart the PBX.
– With Virtual Cards
By connecting the PBX to the LAN, installing each virtual card and registering the IP telephones through
system programming, you can make and receive calls.
Enhanced Walking Extension Feature
It is possible to use the Walking Extension feature with extensions in Service-in (functions normally) and
Service-out (cannot make trunk calls or receive calls) modes, allowing users to use their extensions at
home and at work, or for multiple users who work in shifts to use their own extension settings on a single
telephone.
Built-in Small Call Centre Features
An incoming call distribution (ICD) group can be used as a small call centre with the following features:
– Queuing Feature
When a preprogrammed number of extensions in an ICD group are busy, additional incoming calls can
wait in a queue. While callers are waiting in the queue, they can be sent an outgoing message (OGM)
informing the caller of the current situation, or be redirected to another destination or disconnected
depending on the amount of time the caller has been waiting.
– Log-in/Log-out
ICD group members can join (Log-in) or leave (Log-out) their groups manually. After a call is
completed, a preprogrammed time period where users will not receive calls can be assigned
(Wrap-up). This gives time for users to make reports about the previous call without be interrupted or
allows users to not receive calls while they are taking a break.
– VIP Call
The VIP Call feature is one method of making sure that calls from preferred customers or callers are
answered quickly. When using VIP Call mode, ICD groups are assigned a priority, allowing calls in
higher-priority groups to be answered before calls in lower-priority groups.
Hospitality Features
This PBX has several features allowing it to be used effectively and efficiently in a hotel-type environment.
These features allow extensions assigned as hotel operators to change and monitor the room status of
guest rooms, check or set wake-up calls, and print out records of guest charges.

22 Installation Manual
 1.2.1 Basic Shelf

1.2 Basic System Construction

1.2.1 Basic Shelf

The basic shelf contains an IPCMPR card for controlling the PBX. To use the system, install a power supply
unit (PSU) in the PSU Slot and optional service cards in the basic shelf.

KX-TDE100 KX-TDE200

Construction of the Basic Shelf

A. PSU Slot
B. Free Slots
C. IPCMPR Card

C C
B B
A A

KX-TDE100 KX-TDE200

Installation Manual 23
1.2.2 System Connection Diagram

1.2.2 System Connection Diagram

Private ITSP*¹
IP Network Network
Trunk (Telephone Company Lines)
Analogue/BRI/PRI/T1/E1

Remote PC WAN

Pure IP-PBX Router DCE*²

(e.g., ADSL
Modem)

PC

Batteries

IP-PT

IP Softphone
Fax Machine SLT
PC

SIP Extension

Printer Wireless Phone APT DSS Console

CTI Server
ISDN Telephone
External Sensor/
DPT DSS Console
External Relay Device

USB
PS CS PC
Doorphone & Door Opener
KX-T7636/ PC
KX-T7633

BGM/Music On Hold (MOH) PC

USB

Voice Processing
System KX-DT346/ PC
Pager/ Amplifier KX-DT343
Speaker

KX-T7600 KX-T7600

KX-DT300 KX-DT300

*1
ITSP: Internet Telephony Service Provider
*2
DCE: Data Circuit Terminating Equipment

24 Installation Manual
 1.2.2 System Connection Diagram

LCOT4 CSLC16
(KX-TDA0183) (KX-TDA0177)

LCOT16 MSLC16
(KX-TDA0181) (KX-TDA0175)
LCOT8 SLT Wireless Phone Fax Machine
(KX-TDA0180) SLC16
CID/PAY8 (KX-TDA0174)
(KX-TDA0189)
SLC8
CID8 (KX-TDA0173)
(KX-TDA0193)
Analogue EXT-CID
(KX-TDA0168)
Trunk
DID8 KX-DT300/ KX-DT300/ KX-DT346/
(KX-TDA0182) PC
DLC16 KX-T7600 KX-T7600 KX-DT343/
E & M Line DPT DSS
(KX-TDA0172) DPT DPT KX-T7636/
Telephone Console
E&M8 KX-T7633 DPT
Company (KX-TDA0184) DLC8
ISDN BRI Line (KX-TDA0171)
(Digital Trunk)
BRI4 DHLC8
(KX-TDA0284) (KX-TDA0170)
ISDN PRI Line
(Digital Trunk) BRI8 SLT Wireless Phone APT Fax Machine PT-interface CS PS
(KX-TDA0288) OPB3 Voice
(KX-TDA0190) (DHLC (DHLC only) (DHLC only) (DHLC only)
Processing
PRI30 only) System
T1 Line DPH4
(KX-TDA0290CE/ (KX-TDA0161)
(Digital Trunk) KX-TDA0290CJ)
PRI23 DPH2
(KX-TDA0290) (KX-TDA0162)
Doorphone & Door Opener
EIO4
E1 Line (KX-TDA0164)
(Digital Trunk) T1
(KX-TDA0187)
ECHO16 External Sensor/External Relay Device
(KX-TDA0166)
E1
(KX-TDA0188)
MSG4
(KX-TDA0191)

IP-GW4E ESVM2
(KX-TDA0484) (KX-TDA0192)
Private IP Router IP-GW16
Network (KX-TDA0490) ESVM4
(KX-TDA0194)

PSU-S/ CSIF4
PSU-M/ (KX-TDA0143)
Batteries PSU-L
(KX-TDA0108/ CSIF8 CS PS
KX-TDA0104/ (KX-TDA0144)
KX-TDA0103)
IP-EXT16
(KX-TDA0470)
LAN

Station Message IPCMPR

Detail Recording (SMDR) (Installed by default)
RMT DSP16 IP-PT IP Softphone
(KX-TDA0196) (KX-TDE0110)
Radio
DSP64
(KX-TDE0111)
PC
Amplifier Pager/Speaker
Virtual Virtual
Trunk Slot Extension Slot

V-IPGW16 V-IPEXT32
Private IP Router
LAN
Network WAN V-SIPGW16 V-SIPEXT32

ITSP DCE Router

IP-PT IP Softphone SIP Extension PC CTI Server
Network (e.g., ADSL Mountable Equipment
Modem)

Installation Manual 25
1.3.1 Optional Equipment

1.3 Optional Equipment

1.3.1 Optional Equipment

Model No. Model Name Description

KX-TDE0110 16-Channel VoIP DSP Card 16-channel digital signal processor card with a
(DSP16) 4-Channel IP Trunk activation key and a
8-Channel IP Proprietary Telephone activation
key preinstalled. Compliant with ITU-T G.729A
and G.711 CODEC methods. To be mounted on
the IPCMPR card.
KX-TDE0111 64-Channel VoIP DSP Card 64-channel digital signal processor card with four
(DSP64) 4-Channel IP Trunk activation keys and four
8-Channel IP Proprietary Telephone activation
keys preinstalled. Compliant with ITU-T G.729A
and G.711 CODEC methods. To be mounted on
the IPCMPR card.
KX-TDA0103 L-Type Power Supply Unit (PSU-L) Power Supply Unit for the KX-TDE200. Total
power output of 279 W. Safety Class 1 compliant.
KX-TDA0104 M-Type Power Supply Unit Power Supply Unit for the KX-TDE100 and
(PSU-M) KX-TDE200. Total power output of 140.4 W.
Safety Class 1 compliant.
KX-TDA0108 S-Type Power Supply Unit (PSU-S) Power Supply Unit for the KX-TDE100. Total
power output of 74 W. Safety Class 1 compliant.
KX-TDA0143 4 Cell Station Interface Card 4-port CS interface card for 4 CSs.
(CSIF4)
KX-TDA0144 8 Cell Station Interface Card 8-port CS interface card for 8 CSs.
(CSIF8)
KX-TDA0161 4-Port Doorphone Card (DPH4) 4-port doorphone card for 4 doorphones and 4
door openers. To be mounted on the OPB3 card.
KX-TDA0162 2-Port Doorphone Card (German 2-port doorphone card for 2 German-type
Type) (DPH2) doorphones and 2 door openers. To be mounted
on the OPB3 card.
KX-TDA0164 4-Port External Input/Output Card 4-port external input/output card. To be mounted
(EIO4) on the OPB3 card.
KX-TDA0166 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card 16-channel card for echo cancellation during
(ECHO16) conferences. To be mounted on the OPB3 card.
KX-TDA0168 Extension Caller ID Card (EXT-CID) Sends Caller ID signals to extension ports. To be
mounted on the SLC8 card only.
KX-TDA0170 8-Port Digital Hybrid Extension 8-port digital hybrid extension card for DPTs,
Card (DHLC8) APTs, SLTs, DSS consoles, and PT-interface
CSs, with 2 power failure transfer (PFT) ports.
KX-TDA0171 8-Port Digital Extension Card 8-port digital extension card for DPTs, DSS
(DLC8) consoles, and PT-interface CSs.

26 Installation Manual
 1.3.1 Optional Equipment

Model No. Model Name Description

KX-TDA0172 16-Port Digital Extension Card 16-port digital extension card for DPTs, DSS
(DLC16) consoles, and PT-interface CSs.
KX-TDA0173 8-Port Single Line Telephone 8-port extension card for SLTs with 2 power failure
Extension Card (SLC8) transfer (PFT) ports.
KX-TDA0174 16-Port Single Line Telephone 16-port extension card for SLTs with 4 power
Extension Card (SLC16) failure transfer (PFT) ports.
KX-TDA0175 16-Port Single Line Telephone 16-port extension card for SLTs with Message
Extension with Message Lamp Card Waiting Lamp control and 4 power failure transfer
(MSLC16) (PFT) ports. Maximum power output of 160 V/90
V for Message Waiting Lamp control.
KX-TDA0177 16-Port Single Line Telephone 16-port extension card for SLTs with Caller ID
Extension Card with Caller ID (FSK) and 4 power failure transfer (PFT) ports.
(CSLC16)
KX-TDA0180 8-Port Analogue Trunk Card 8-port analogue trunk card with 2 power failure
(LCOT8) transfer (PFT) ports.
KX-TDA0181 16-Port Analogue Trunk Card 16-port analogue trunk card with 4 power failure
(LCOT16) transfer (PFT) ports.
KX-TDA0182 8-Port DID Card (DID8) 8-port DID trunk card.
KX-TDA0183 4-Port Analogue Trunk Card 4-port analogue trunk card with 2 power failure
(LCOT4) transfer (PFT) ports.
KX-TDA0184 8-Port E & M Trunk Card (E&M8) 8-port E & M (TIE) trunk card. Type 5 support.
KX-TDA0187 T-1 Trunk Card (T1) 1-port T1 trunk card. EIA/TIA standard compliant.
KX-TDA0188 E-1 Trunk Card (E1) 1-port E1 trunk card. ITU-T standard compliant.
KX-TDA0189 8-Port Caller ID/Pay Tone Card 8-port Caller ID signal type FSK/FSK (with Call
(CID/PAY8) Waiting Caller ID [Visual Caller ID])/DTMF, and
8-port Pay Tone Service (12 kHz/16 kHz). To be
mounted on the LCOT8/LCOT16 cards.
KX-TDA0190 Optional 3-Slot Base Card (OPB3) Optional 3-slot base card for mounting a maximum
of 3 option cards from the following: MSG4,
ESVM2, ESVM4, DPH4, DPH2, EIO4, or
ECHO16 card.
KX-TDA0191 4-Channel Message Card (MSG4) 4-channel message card. To be mounted on the
OPB3 card.
KX-TDA0192 2-Channel Simplified Voice 2-channel simplified voice message card for
Message Card (ESVM2) Built-in Simplified Voice Message feature. Also
supports MSG card features. To be mounted on
the OPB3 card.
KX-TDA0193 8-Port Caller ID Card (CID8) 8-port Caller ID signal type FSK/FSK (with Call
Waiting Caller ID [Visual Caller ID])/DTMF. To be
mounted on the LCOT8/LCOT16 cards.

Installation Manual 27
1.3.1 Optional Equipment

Model No. Model Name Description

KX-TDA0194 4-Channel Simplified Voice 4-channel simplified voice message card for
Message Card (ESVM4) Built-in Simplified Voice Message feature. Also
supports MSG card features. To be mounted on
the OPB3 card.
KX-TDA0196 Remote Card (RMT) Analogue modem card for remote communication
with the PBX. ITU-T V.90 support. To be mounted
on the IPCMPR card.
KX-TDA0284 4-Port BRI Card (BRI4) 4-port ISDN Basic Rate Interface card with 1
power failure transfer port. EURO-ISDN/ETSI
compliant.
KX-TDA0288 8-Port BRI Card (BRI8) 8-port ISDN Basic Rate Interface card with 1
power failure transfer port. EURO-ISDN/ETSI
compliant.
KX-TDA0290CE PRI Card (PRI30) 1-port ISDN Primary Rate Interface card (30B
channels). EURO-ISDN/ETSI compliant.
KX-TDA0290CJ PRI Card (PRI30) 1-port ISDN Primary Rate Interface card (30B
channels). EURO-ISDN/ETSI compliant.
KX-TDA0290 PRI Card (PRI23) 1-port ISDN Primary Rate Interface card (23B
channels). NI (North American standard ISDN
protocol) compliant.
KX-TDA0470 16-Channel VoIP Extension Card 16-channel VoIP extension card. Compliant with
(IP-EXT16) Panasonic proprietary protocol, and ITU-T G.
729A and G.711 CODEC methods.
KX-TDA0484 4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card 4-channel VoIP gateway card. Compliant with
(IP-GW4E) VoIP H.323 V.2 protocol, and ITU-T G.729A, G.
723.1 and G.711 CODEC methods.
KX-TDA0490 16-Channel VoIP Gateway Card 16-channel VoIP gateway card. Compliant with
(IP-GW16) VoIP H.323 V.2 protocol, and ITU-T G.729A, G.
723.1 and G.711 CODEC methods.

Note
For the maximum number of optional service cards that can be installed in the PBX, refer to "1.4.3 System
Capacity".

28 Installation Manual
 1.4.1 General Description

1.4 Specifications

1.4.1 General Description

Control Bus Original bus (16-bit, 8 MHz, 10 megabytes per second)
Communication Bus H.100 bus conformity (1024 time slots)
Switching Non-blocking
Power Input PSU-S 100 V AC to 130 V AC; 1.4 A/200 V AC to 240 V AC; 0.8 A; 50
Hz/60 Hz
PSU-M 100 V AC to 130 V AC; 2.5 A/200 V AC to 240 V AC; 1.4 A; 50
Hz/60 Hz
PSU-L 100 V AC to 130 V AC; 5.1 A/200 V AC to 240 V AC; 2.55 A; 50
Hz/60 Hz
External Battery +36 V DC (+12 V DC ´ 3, recommended maximum capacity is
28 Ah)
Maximum Power Failure Tolerance 300 ms (without using backup batteries)
Memory Backup Duration 7 years
Dialling Trunk Dial Pulse (DP) 10 pps, 20 pps
Tone (DTMF) Dialling
Extension Dial Pulse (DP) 10 pps, 20 pps
Tone (DTMF) Dialling
Mode Conversion DP-DTMF, DTMF-DP
Ring Frequency 20 Hz/25 Hz (selectable)
Trunk Loop Limit 1600 W maximum
Operating Temperature 0 °C to 40 °C
Environment
Humidity 10 % to 90 % (non-condensing)
Conference Call Trunk From 10 ´ 3-party conference call to 4 ´ 8-party conference call
Music on Hold (MOH) 2 ports (Level Control: -11 dB to +11 dB in 1 dB steps)
MOH1: External Music Source port
MOH2: Selectable Internal/External Music Source port
Paging Internal Level Control: -15 dB to +6 dB in 3 dB steps
External 2 ports (Volume Control: -15 dB to +15 dB in 1 dB steps)
Serial Interface Port RS-232C 1 (maximum 115.2 kbps)
RJ45 Port MNT Port 1 (for PC connection)
LAN Port 1 (for LAN connection)

Installation Manual 29
1.4.1 General Description

Extension Connection Cable SLT 1-pair wire (T, R)

DPT 1-pair wire (D1, D2) or
2-pair wire (T, R, D1, D2)
APT 2-pair wire (T, R, D1, D2)
PT-interface CS 1-pair wire (D1, D2)
PT-interface CS (High-density) 4-pair wire (D1, D2)
DSS Console and Add-on Key 1-pair wire (D1, D2)
Module
Dimension KX-TDE100 334 mm (W) ´ 390 mm (H) ´ 272 mm (D)
KX-TDE200 430 mm (W) ´ 415 mm (H) ´ 276 mm (D)
Weight (when fully KX-TDE100 Under 12 kg
mounted)
KX-TDE200 Under 16 kg

30 Installation Manual
 1.4.2 Characteristics

1.4.2 Characteristics
Terminal Equipment Loop Limit • PT: KX-DT300/KX-T7600 series DPT: 90 W; all other DPTs/APTs:
40 W
• SLT: 600 W including set
• Doorphone: 20 W
• CS: 130 W; PT-interface CS: 65 W
Minimum Leakage Resistance 15 000 W minimum
Maximum Number of Extension 1. for PT or SLT
Instruments per Line 2. by Parallel or eXtra Device Port connection of an APT/DPT and an
SLT
3. by Digital eXtra Device Port connection of 2 DPTs and an SLT
Ring Voltage 75 Vrms at 20 Hz/25 Hz depending on the Ringing Load
Trunk Loop Limit 1600 W maximum
Hookswitch Flash/Recall Timing 24 ms to 2032 ms
Range
BRI Cards Internal ISDN Mode Supply Voltage: 40 V
Power Supply (BRI4): 4.5 W per 1 line, 10 W per 4 lines
Power Supply (BRI8): 4.5 W per 1 line, 20 W per 8 lines
Power Supply Method: Phantom Power Supply
Door Opener Current Limit 24 V DC/30 V AC, 1 A maximum
External Relay Current Limit 24 V DC/30 V AC, 1 A maximum
External Sensor Current Limit Power to the external sensor is provided from the EIO4 card and must
be grounded through the EIO4 card. For the connection diagram, refer
to "3.7.4 EIO4 Card (KX-TDA0164)". The PBX detects input from the
sensor when the signal is under 100 W.
Paging Terminal Impedance 600 W
MOH (Music on Hold) Terminal 10 000 W
Impedance

Installation Manual 31
1.4.3 System Capacity

1.4.3 System Capacity

Type and Maximum Number of Slots
The PBX supports the following type and number of slots.

Maximum Number
Slot Type
KX-TDE100 KX-TDE200

IPCMPR Card Slot 1 1

Free Slot 6 11
Virtual Trunk Slot 4 4
Virtual Slot
Virtual Extension Slot 4 4

IPCMPR Card Slot and Free Slots

KX-TDE100 KX-TDE200

B B
A C

A. Free Slots 1 to 6 (from the left)

B. IPCMPR Card Slot
C. Free Slots 1 to 11 (from the left)

32 Installation Manual
 1.4.3 System Capacity

Virtual Slots of the IPCMPR Card

Virtual Trunk Virtual

Slots Extension Slots

IPCMPR Card Virtual Slots

Maximum Optional Service Cards

The following number of cards can be installed in the Free Slots or Virtual Slots of the PBX.

Note
• Any card that exceeds the capacity of the PBX will be ignored.
• When the PBX starts up with an invalid configuration, some cards will be ignored.

Installation Manual 33
1.4.3 System Capacity

Cards Installed in Free Slots or Virtual Slots

Maximum Number
Card Type
KX-TDE100 KX-TDE200
IPCMPR 1 1
Trunk Card 8 8
Virtual Trunk Card 4 4
V-IPGW16 2 2
V-SIPGW16 2 2
*1 *2
Physical Trunk Card Total 6 Total 8
LCOT4
LCOT8
LCOT16
DID8 6 8
E&M8
BRI4
BRI8
T1
E1
4 4
PRI23
PRI30
IP-GW4E
4 4
IP-GW16
Extension Card 8 8
Virtual Extension Card 4 4
V-IPEXT32 2 2
V-SIPEXT32 4 4
Physical Extension Card Total 6 Total 8
DHLC8
DLC8
DLC16
SLC8
6 8
SLC16
CSLC16
MSLC16
IP-EXT16
CSIF4
4 4
CSIF8
OPB3 4 4
Total 14 16
*1 When installing T1, E1, PRI30, PRI23 cards, make sure that the number of these cards 2 + the number of the other cards
does not exceed 8.
*2 One T1, E1, PRI30, or PRI23 card counts as 2 cards.

34 Installation Manual
 1.4.3 System Capacity

Cards Mounted on Other Optional Service Cards

Maximum Number
Card Type Mounted on
KX-TDE100 KX-TDE200

DSP16
1 1
DSP64 IPCMPR Card
RMT 1 1
CID/PAY8
12 16 LCOT8 Card/LCOT16 Card
CID8
EXT-CID 6 8 SLC8 Card
DPH4 4 4
DPH2 8 8
ECHO16 2*1 2*1
MSG4 OPB3 Card
ESVM2 4 4
ESVM4
EIO4 4 4
*1
Only 1 ECHO16 card can be mounted on each OPB3 card.

Maximum Trunks and Extensions

The PBX supports the following number of trunks and extensions.

Type KX-TDE100 KX-TDE200

Total Number of Trunks 128 128

Trunk (Physical Trunk Card) 120 128

Trunk (Virtual Trunk Card) 32 32
Total Number of Extensions 256 256

Extension (Physical Extension Card) 160 256

Extension (Virtual Extension Card) 128 128

IP-PT and IP Softphone 64 64

SIP Extension 128 128

Installation Manual 35
1.4.3 System Capacity

Note
For non-peer-to-peer calls via the DSP card, calls cannot be made or received when all of the card’s
resources are being used.

36 Installation Manual
 1.4.3 System Capacity

Maximum Terminal Equipment

The following shows the number of each terminal equipment type supported by the PBX.

Terminal Equipment Type KX-TDE100 KX-TDE200

Telephone 256 256

SLT 96 128
KX-DT300/KX-T7600 series DPT 128 256
KX-T7560/KX-T7565 DPT 96 128
Other DPT 32 128
APT 24 64
IP-PT 160 160

IP-PT*1 (supported by IP-EXT16 96 128

card)
IP-PT*2(supported by IPCMPR 64 64
card)
SIP Extension 128 128
DSS console 8 8
CS 32 32
High-density CS 16 16
PS 128 128
Voice Processing System (VPS) 2 2
Doorphone 16 16
Door Opener 16 16
External Sensor 16 16
External Relay 16 16

*1
KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT366/KX-NT305), KX-NT265, and KX-NT136
*2
KX-NT300 series and KX-NT265 (software version 2.00 or later only)

Installation Manual 37
1.4.3 System Capacity

Note for KX-NT265 IP-PT users

The supported card varies depending on the software version of your KX-NT265 IP-PT. To confirm the version,
follow the procedure below:

While starting up
PROGRAM SP-PHONE SP-PHONE
"AP Version".
Select Select
"Maintenance". "Version display".

To exit the programming mode

SP-PHONE Software version HOLD HOLD HOLD HOLD
is displayed.

Power Supply Unit Selection

The PBX needs a power supply unit (PSU) suitable for its configuration. Calculate the load figure from the type
and number of items of equipment to be connected, and determine the type of PSU that will be required.

Load Figure Calculation

Equipment Type Load Figure

PT KX-DT300 series DPT/KX-DT300 series DSS 1

console/KX-T7600 series DPT/KX-T7600 series
DSS console
KX-T7560/KX-T7565 DPT 1
Other DPT/Other DSS console 4
APT 4
IP-PT 0
SIP Extension 0
Extension Card*1 DHLC8 8
SLC8 8
SLC16/MSLC16/CSLC16 16
CS (1 unit) 4
High-density CS (1 unit) 8
ISDN Extension 2
VPS (1 port) 1

*1
Only the extension cards that can support SLTs count for the load figures.

38 Installation Manual
 1.4.3 System Capacity

PSU Capacity
Each PSU supports a different load figure.

PSU Type Maximum Load Figure

PSU-S (for KX-TDE100 only) 64

PSU-M 128
PSU-L (for KX-TDE200 only) 512

Calculation Example (KX-TDE200)

Equipment Type Load Figure

KX-T7600 series DPT 48 units 48

Other DPT 2 units 8
SLC16 1 card 16
MSLC16 1 card 16
VPS 8 ports 8
Total 96

The total load figure is 96. As this is between 64 and 128, you should install the PSU-M. But if you expect
expansion in the future, it may be better to install the PSU-L. There is no harm in installing a PSU that is larger
than is required for the current configuration.

Installation Manual 39
1.4.3 System Capacity

40 Installation Manual
 Section 2
Activation Key Installation

This section describes information on activation keys,

including how to obtain an activation key and install it in
the SD Memory Card.

Installation Manual 41
2.1.1 Activation Keys

2.1 Information about the Activation Keys

2.1.1 Activation Keys

To use IP trunks and IP telephones on a private IP network using the IPCMPR card or to upgrade the software
for enhanced features, you need the appropriate activation keys.
Activation Keys are provided via the DSP16/DSP64 card and optional activation key files.

Type and Maximum Number of Activation Keys

The PBX supports the following type and number of activation keys:
Maximum Supported IP Trunks/
Activation Key Type Description
Number IP Telephones
Allows the use of 2 IP trunks (H.323/
2 IP Trunk*1 16
SIP).
32 IP trunks (H.323/SIP)
Allows the use of 4 IP trunks (H.323/
4 IP Trunk *1
8
SIP).
Allows the use of 1 IP-PT/IP
1 IP Softphone/IP PT*2 64
softphone.
Allows the use of 4 IP-PTs/IP
4 IP Softphone/IP PT*2 16
softphones.
64 IP-PTs/IP softphones
Allows the use of 8 IP-PTs/IP
8 IP Softphone/IP PT *2
8
softphones.
Allows the use of 16 IP-PTs/IP
16 IP Softphone/IP PT*2 4
softphones.
1 IP PT Allows the use of 1 IP-PT. 64
4 IP PT Allows the use of 4 IP-PTs. 16
64 IP-PTs
8 IP PT Allows the use of 8 IP-PTs. 8
16 IP PT Allows the use of 16 IP-PTs. 4
1 SIP Extension Allows the use of 1 SIP Extension. 128
4 SIP Extension Allows the use of 4 SIP Extensions. 32
128 SIP Extensions
8 SIP Extension Allows the use of 8 SIP Extensions. 16
16 SIP Extension Allows the use of 16 SIP Extensions. 8
Upgrades software to use enhanced
Software Upgrade 01 1 -
features.
*1
You need to set the number of the installed activation key to be used for H.323 trunks through system programming. By default, all
the installed activation keys will be used for SIP trunks.
*2
You can set how many IP-PTs can be used with the installed activation keys through system programming. By default, only IP
softphones can be used with the installed activation keys.

Preinstalled Activation Keys in the DSP16/DSP64

The following type and number of activation keys are preinstalled on the DSP16/DSP64 card:

42 Installation Manual
 2.1.1 Activation Keys

Card Type Activation Key Supported IP Trunks/IP-PTs

4-Channel IP Trunk 1 4 IP trunks (H.323/SIP)

DSP16 8-Channel IP Proprietary
1 8 IP-PTs
Telephone
4-Channel IP Trunk 4 16 IP trunks (H.323/SIP)
DSP64 8-Channel IP Proprietary
4 32 IP-PTs
Telephone

Depending on the number of IP trunks and IP-PTs to be used, you need to select either the DSP16 or
DSP64 card.
Example: Preinstalled Activation Keys in the DSP16 Card

Additional Activation Keys in the SD Memory Card (Activation Key Files)

In addition to the preinstalled activation keys on the DSP16/DSP64 card, the following type and number of
activation keys can be installed in the SD Memory Card:

Maximum Number Supported IP Trunks/IP Telephones

Activation Key Type
with DSP16 with DSP64 with DSP16 with DSP64

2 IP Trunk 14 8 28 IP trunks (H.323/ 16 IP trunks (H.323/

4 IP Trunk 7 4 SIP) SIP)

56 IP-PTs/IP 32 IP-PTs/IP
1 IP Softphone/IP PT 56 32
softphones softphones
56 IP-PTs/IP 32 IP-PTs/IP
4 IP Softphone/IP PT 14 8
softphones softphones
56 IP-PTs/IP 32 IP-PTs/IP
8 IP Softphone/IP PT 7 4
softphones softphones
48 IP-PTs/IP 32 IP-PTs/IP
16 IP Softphone/IP PT 3 2
softphones softphones
1 IP PT 56 32 56 IP-PTs 32 IP-PTs
4 IP PT 14 8 56 IP-PTs 32 IP-PTs
8 IP PT 7 4 56 IP-PTs 32 IP-PTs

Installation Manual 43
2.1.1 Activation Keys

Maximum Number Supported IP Trunks/IP Telephones

Activation Key Type
with DSP16 with DSP64 with DSP16 with DSP64

16 IP PT 3 2 48 IP-PTs 32 IP-PTs
1 SIP Extension 128
4 SIP Extension 32
128 SIP Extensions
8 SIP Extension 16
16 SIP Extension 8
Software Upgrade 01 1 -

If the preinstalled activation keys in the DSP card are not enough for the desired configuration or if you wish
to use enhanced features, it is necessary to obtain additional activation keys in the form of activation key files
and install them in the SD Memory Card. For information about how to obtain the additional activation keys,
refer to "2.1.2 Activation Key Code and Key Management System". For information about how to install the
activation key files in the SD Memory Card, refer to "2.1.3 Activation Key File".

Activation Key Installation Example

The following shows an example of when using 16 H.323 trunks, 16 SIP trunks, 32 IP-PTs, 32 IP softphones,
and 64 SIP Extensions on a private IP network using the IPCMPR card.

Virtual Trunk Virtual Extension

Slots Slots
IPCMPR Card

SD Memory Card DSP64 Card

4-Channel IP Trunk 4-Channel IP Trunk

16-Channel SIP
Extension
16 IP trunks 16 IP trunks
(H.323/SIP) (H.323/SIP) Total Total
16 H.323 trunks 32 IP-PTs
8-Channel IP Softphone/ 8-Channel IP
IP Proprietary Telephone Proprietary Telephone
16 SIP trunks 32 IP softphones
64 SIP Extensions 64 SIP Extensions

32 IP softphones 32 IP-PTs
Virtual Slots

44 Installation Manual
 2.1.2 Activation Key Code and Key Management System

2.1.2 Activation Key Code and Key Management System

To obtain additional activation keys, you need to purchase the appropriate activation key codes and access
the Key Management System. You can download the activation keys as an activation key file from the Key
Management System. To download the activation keys, enter the MPR ID number shown on the IPCMPR card
in the PBX, and activation key number and registration ID provided on each activation key code.
The following activation keys are available:

Model No. Activation Key Type Description

KX-NCS4102 2 IP Trunk Provides the activation key number and registration ID to

download the activation key that enables the use of 2 IP
trunks (H.323/SIP).
KX-NCS4104 4 IP Trunk Provides the activation key number and registration ID to
download the activation key that enables the use of 4 IP
trunks (H.323/SIP).
KX-NCS4201 1 IP Softphone/IP PT Provides the activation key number and registration ID to
download the activation key that enables the use of 1
IP-PT/IP softphone.
KX-NCS4204 4 IP Softphone/IP PT Provides the activation key number and registration ID to
download the activation key that enables the use of 4
IP-PTs/IP softphones.
KX-NCS4208 8 IP Softphone/IP PT Provides the activation key number and registration ID to
download the activation key that enables the use of 8
IP-PTs/IP softphones.
KX-NCS4216 16 IP Softphone/IP PT Provides the activation key number and registration ID to
download the activation key that enables the use of 16
IP-PTs/IP softphones.
KX-NCS4501 1 IP PT Provides the activation key number and registration ID to
download the activation key that enables the use of 1
IP-PT.
KX-NCS4504 4 IP PT Provides the activation key number and registration ID to
download the activation key that enables the use of 4
IP-PTs.
KX-NCS4508 8 IP PT Provides the activation key number and registration ID to
download the activation key that enables the use of 8
IP-PTs.
KX-NCS4516 16 IP PT Provides the activation key number and registration ID to
download the activation key that enables the use of 16
IP-PTs.
KX-NCS4701 1 SIP Extension Provides the activation key number and registration ID to
download the activation key that enables the use of 1 SIP
Extension.
KX-NCS4704 4 SIP Extension Provides the activation key number and registration ID to
download the activation key that enables the use of 4 SIP
Extensions.
KX-NCS4708 8 SIP Extension Provides the activation key number and registration ID to
download the activation key that enables the use of 8 SIP
Extensions.

Installation Manual 45
2.1.2 Activation Key Code and Key Management System

Model No. Activation Key Type Description

KX-NCS4716 16 SIP Extension Provides the activation key number and registration ID to
download the activation key that enables the use of 16
SIP Extensions.
KX-NCS4910 Software Upgrade 01 Provides the activation key number and registration ID to
download the activation key that enables the use of
enhanced features.

Note
• You can only download the activation key file once using the activation key number and registration ID
provided on the activation key code.
• Up to 8 activation keys can be downloaded as one activation key file.
• Up to 30 activation key files can be installed in the SD Memory Card.
• It is possible to send the activation key file to a specified e-mail address at the same time as
downloading it to a PC.
• Make sure to backup the downloaded activation key files on your PC.
• In the event of a system malfunction, you need a temporary activation key for maintenance purposes.
The temporary activation key can only be used for a limited time period, and can be downloaded from
the Key Management System in the same way as downloading activation key files.

46 Installation Manual
 2.1.3 Activation Key File

2.1.3 Activation Key File

The corresponding number of IP trunks and IP telephones or enhanced features can be activated by installing
the downloaded activation key file(s) in the SD Memory Card of the IPCMPR card using the Maintenance
Console.

Installing the Activation Key File in the SD Memory Card

Make sure to install the Maintenance Console on the PC in advance, and connect the PC to the PBX. For
details about the Maintenance Console, refer to "Section 4 Guide for the Maintenance Console".
1. Start the Maintenance Console from the Start menu on the PC.
2. From the Utility menu, select File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card).
A dialogue box will be displayed.
3. Select the file to upload.
A window showing the upload progress will be displayed.
While transferring files to the SD memory card, the PBX automatically renames them according to the
header information.
A message will be displayed when the transfer is complete.
4. Click OK.
5. Under Configuration, click Slot.
6. Click Activation Key.
7. For IP trunk activation key file(s), click Execute.
A confirmation message will be displayed. Click Yes.

Note
• It is necessary to restart the PBX to activate the Software Upgrade 01 activation key after performing
the procedure above. To restart the PBX, refer to "5.1.4 Using the Reset Button".
• For information about programming activation keys using the Maintenance Console, refer to "3.3 [1-1]
Slot—Activation Key" in the PC Programming Manual.

CAUTION
The activation key file can only be installed in the PBX with the MPR ID number entered when the activation
key file was downloaded. The activation key file cannot be reissued unless the IPCMPR card crashes.

Installation Manual 47
2.1.3 Activation Key File

48 Installation Manual
 Section 3
Installation

This section describes the procedures to install the

PBX. Detailed instructions for planning the installation
site, installing the shelves and optional service cards,
and cabling of peripheral equipment are provided.
Further information on system expansion and peripheral
equipment installation is included.

Installation Manual 49
3.1.1 Before Installation

3.1 Before Installation

3.1.1 Before Installation

Please read the following notes concerning installation and connection before installing the PBX and terminal
equipment.
Be sure to comply with all applicable laws, regulations, and guidelines.

Safety Installation Instructions

WARNING
When installing telephone wiring, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce
the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
• Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
• Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet
locations.
• Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been
disconnected at the network interface.
• Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.

Installation Precautions
This set is made for wall mounting (KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or floor standing (KX-TDE200 only), and should
be installed in a location where it is accessible for inspections and maintenance.

CAUTION
To prevent malfunction, noise, or discolouration, follow the instructions below:
Do not install the system in the following locations:
• In direct sunlight and hot, cold, or humid places. (Temperature range: 0 °C to 40 °C)
• Areas where sulfuric gases may be present, such as near thermal springs.
• Areas where shocks or vibrations are frequent or strong.
• High-dust areas, or places the system may come into contact with water or oil.
• Near devices that generate high frequencies, such as sewing machines or electric welders.
• Locations where other objects will obstruct the area around the PBX. Be especially careful to leave at
least 20 cm of space above and 10 cm to the sides of the PBX for ventilation.

Notice
Do not install the system in the following locations:
• On or near computers, telexes, or other office equipment, as well as microwave ovens or air
conditioners. (It is preferable not to install the system in the same room as the above equipment.)
• Within 1.8 m of radios and televisions. (Both the PBX and PTs should be at least 1.8 m away from such
devices.)
Do not perform the following:
• Do not block the openings of the PBX.
• Do not stack up the optional service cards.

Wiring Precautions
Be sure to follow these instructions when wiring the unit:

50 Installation Manual
 3.1.1 Before Installation

WARNING
• Do not run unshielded telephone cables near AC power cables, computer cables, AC power
sources, etc. When running cables near other noise-generating devices or cables, use shielded
telephone cables or shield the telephone cables with metal tubing.
• If cables are run on the floor, use protectors to prevent the cables from being stepped on. Avoid
running cables under carpets.
• For safety purposes this unit is equipped with an earthed plug. If you do not have an earthed
outlet, please have one installed. Do not bypass this safety feature by tampering with the plug.

CAUTION
• Avoid using the same AC outlet for computers, telexes, and other office equipment, as noise generated
by such equipment may hamper system performance or interrupt the system.
• Unplug the system from its power source when wiring, and plug the system back in only after all wiring
is completed.
• Trunks should be installed with surge protectors. For details, refer to "3.2.14 Surge Protector
Installation".

Notice
• Use 2-pair telephone cables when connecting PTs.
Use 1-pair telephone cables when connecting SLTs, data terminals, answering machines, computers,
Voice Processing Systems, etc.
• Mis-wiring may cause the PBX to operate improperly. Refer to "Section 3 Installation" when wiring
the system.
• If an extension does not operate properly, disconnect the telephone from the extension line and connect
it again, or turn off the PBX using the power switch, then turn it on again.
• Use twisted pair cable for trunk connection.

Installation Manual 51
3.2.1 Unpacking

3.2 Installation of the PBX

3.2.1 Unpacking
Unpack the box and check the items below:

KX-TDE100 KX-TDE200

Main Unit 1 1
Ferrite Core (for the IPCMPR card) 2 2
AC Cord with a Ferrite Core*1 1*2 1*2
Metal Bracket 1 1
Screw A 3 4
Screw B (Black) 2 6
Anchor Plug 3 4
Mini Plug (for pager and music source) 4 4
SD Memory Card 1 1

*1
In Canada, there is no ferrite core attached to the AC cord.
*2
KX-TDE100BX/KX-TDE200BX is supplied with 2 types of AC cord. Please use whichever is appropriate for the country/area.

52 Installation Manual
 3.2.2 Names and Locations

3.2.2 Names and Locations

Inside View
KX-TDE100 KX-TDE200

D D
C C
B B
A A

E F G H I E J HI

A. RUN Indicator
B. ALARM Indicator
C. MNT Port
D. LAN Port
E. PSU Slot
F. Null Slot (not available for any optional service card)
G. Free Slots 1 to 6 (from the left)
H. IPCMPR Card Slot
I. RS-232C Port
J. Free Slots 1 to 11 (from the left)

Installation Manual 53
3.2.3 Opening/Closing the Front Cover

3.2.3 Opening/Closing the Front Cover

Opening the Front Cover
1. Insert a flathead screwdriver into the opening (on the left of the screw cover) and unlatch the screw cover.

Screw Cover

2. Turn the screw anticlockwise to loosen.

3. Slide the front cover to the right until it stops, then lift the front cover.

54 Installation Manual
 3.2.3 Opening/Closing the Front Cover

Closing the Front Cover

1. Hook the front cover onto the shelf (line up the protrusions on the cover with the receptacles on the shelf).
Then slide the front cover to the left until it locks.

2. Turn the screw clockwise to tighten.

3. Secure the screw cover.

2
1

CAUTION
• For safety reasons, close the front cover and tighten the screw before operating the PBX.
• Do not forget to tighten the screw before securing the screw cover.

Installation Manual 55
3.2.4 Installing/Replacing the Power Supply Unit

3.2.4 Installing/Replacing the Power Supply Unit

Function
PSU Type Lower/Upper Input Voltage Range Current Input Frequency

PSU-S Lower: 100 V AC to 130 V AC 1.4 A

(for KX-TDE100) Upper: 200 V AC to 240 V AC 0.8 A
PSU-M Lower: 100 V AC to 130 V AC 2.5 A
(for KX-TDE100/ Upper: 200 V AC to 240 V AC 1.4 A 50 Hz or 60 Hz
KX-TDE200)
PSU-L Lower: 100 V AC to 130 V AC 5.1 A
(for KX-TDE200) Upper: 200 V AC to 240 V AC 2.55 A

PSU-S PSU-M/PSU-L

Battery Switch
Battery Switch
Battery Connector
Battery Connector

Earth Terminal
Power Switch

Earth Terminal Power Switch

AC Inlet AC Inlet

Accessories and User-supplied Items

Accessories (included): Screws ´ 4
User-supplied (not included): Earthing wire, Back-up Battery Cable (KX-A228 for PSU-S and PSU-M, or
KX-A229 for PSU-L)

Note
• For details about frame earth connection, refer to "3.2.5 Frame Earth Connection".
• For details about backup batteries connection, refer to "3.2.6 Backup Battery Connection".

Safety Instructions
Each PSU complies with Safety Class 1 of IEC60950, EN60950, UL60950, CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.60950, and
AS/NZS60950; therefore a protective earth connection exists between the mains outlet ground and the PSU
case. To ensure the PBX chassis is safely grounded, it is essential that the PSU case be securely fastened to
the PBX chassis with the 4 screws provided with each PSU.
When installing or replacing a PSU, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of
fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
1. Never install or replace a PSU during a lightning storm.
2. Never install or replace a PSU in wet locations.

56 Installation Manual
 3.2.4 Installing/Replacing the Power Supply Unit

3. Never install or replace a PSU unless at least 20 s has elapsed after the AC supply and backup battery
supply are disconnected.
4. To protect the back board from static electricity, do not touch parts on the back board in the main unit and
PSU. To discharge static electricity, touch ground or wear an earthing strap.

The following procedures are for installing or replacing a PSU only. Do not replace or remove the PSU
for any other purpose.

Installing the Power Supply Unit

1. Insert the PSU along the guide rails.

CAUTION
For safety reasons, do not touch parts in the PSU.

Guide Rail

2. Push the release lever in the direction of the arrow, so that the PSU engages securely with the connector
on the back board.
Back Board

Release Lever

Installation Manual 57
3.2.4 Installing/Replacing the Power Supply Unit

3. Turn the 4 screws clockwise, in the order indicated by the numbers 1 to 4, to fix the PSU.
3 2

Screws

4 1

Replacing the Power Supply Unit

1. Unplug the AC power cord and Back-up Battery Cable.

2. Turn the 4 screws anticlockwise to loosen them.

Screws

58 Installation Manual
 3.2.4 Installing/Replacing the Power Supply Unit

3. Pull the release lever in the direction of the arrow to disconnect the PSU from the back board.
Back Board

Release Lever

4. Replace the PSU.

New PSU Current PSU

5. Follow the steps in "Installing the Power Supply Unit".

Installation Manual 59
3.2.5 Frame Earth Connection

3.2.5 Frame Earth Connection

1. Loosen the screw. Screw
2. Insert an earthing wire (user-supplied).
3. Tighten the screw.
4. Connect the earthing wire to earth.

Earthing
wire
To earth

WARNING
Proper earthing (connection to earth) is very important to protect the PBX from the bad effects of
external noise or to reduce the risk to the user of electrocution in the case of a lightning strike.

CAUTION
• Make sure to separately connect the frame of each shelf to a different earth terminal. Do not connect
it to other shelves.
• For earthing wire, green-and-yellow insulation is required, and the cross-sectional area of the conductor
must be more than 0.75 mm2 or 18 AWG.
• The earthing wire of the AC cable has an effect against external noise and lightning strikes, but it may
not be enough to protect the PBX. A permanent connection between earth and the earth terminal of
each PBX must be made.

Notice
Be sure to comply with applicable local regulations (e.g., laws, guidelines).

60 Installation Manual
 3.2.6 Backup Battery Connection

3.2.6 Backup Battery Connection

The backup batteries and Back-up Battery Cable provide a backup power supply to allow full use of the PBX
in the event of a power failure. In case of power failure, the backup batteries automatically maintain the power
to the PBX without interruption.

User-supplied Items
• Backup Batteries: VRLA (Valve Regulated Lead Acid) 12 V DC ´ 3
• Back-up Battery Cable: KX-A228 (for PSU-S and PSU-M) or KX-A229 (for PSU-L)

WARNING
• There is a danger of explosion if backup batteries are incorrectly replaced. Replace only with
the same or equivalent type recommended by the battery manufacturer. Dispose of used
batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
• Make sure that you do not short the backup batteries or cables.

CAUTION
• Make sure that each Back-up Battery Cable is securely fastened to both the backup batteries and the
shelf.
• Make sure that the polarities of the backup batteries and wiring are correct.
• Use the correct type of Back-up Battery Cable for the PSU.

Notice
Be sure to comply with applicable local regulations (e.g., laws, guidelines).

Note
• Turn on the battery switch on the PSU only after the installation of the PBX is finished and AC power
is available.
• The recommended maximum capacity is 28 Ah, to maintain effective battery charge.
• Make sure that the type and capacity of the 3 backup batteries are identical.
• The Back-up Battery Cable should not be exposed to direct sunlight. Keep the Back-up Battery Cable
and the backup batteries away from heating appliances and fire. Place the backup batteries in a
ventilated place.
• For details about the backup batteries, refer to the manual for the batteries.

Backup Power Supply Duration

The length of time that backup batteries can power the PBX varies depending on the total load figure. For how
to calculate the load figure from the connected items, refer to "Load Figure Calculation".

Examples
Battery Capacity Total Load Figure Backup Power Supply Duration*1

64 11 h
28 Ah 128 5.5 h
512 3h

*1
The duration may vary depending on the conditions.

Installation Manual 61
3.2.6 Backup Battery Connection

Connecting Backup Batteries

1. Turn off the battery switch on the PSU.
2. Connect the Back-up Battery Cable to a set of 3 identical batteries.

Battery Switch
Battery Connector

Back-up Battery Cable

Fuse

Red Black

Backup Batteries (VRLA 12 V DC x 3)

62 Installation Manual
 3.2.7 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards

3.2.7 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards

CAUTION
To protect the back board from static electricity, do not touch parts on the back board in the main unit and
on the optional service cards. To discharge static electricity, touch ground or wear an earthing strap.

Note
The optional service cards can be installed or removed while the DC power is supplied. However, when
installing or removing the IPCMPR card, the DC power supply must be turned off.

Installing Optional Service Cards

1. Insert the card along the guide rails.

Guide Rail

2. Holding the card as shown below, push the release lever in the direction of the arrow so that the card
engages securely with the connector on the back board.
Back Board

Release Lever

Installation Manual 63
3.2.7 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards

3. Turn the 2 screws clockwise to fix the card in place.

Screws

Note
Make sure the screws are tightened to earth the card securely.

64 Installation Manual
 3.2.7 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards

Covering the Blank Slots

Be sure to cover each slot in which no optional service card is installed by using a Blank Slot Cover.

CAUTION
Failure to install the Blank Slot Cover may cause electromagnetic interference.

Installation Manual 65
3.2.7 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards

Handling of the Cables

When cables are connected to the PBX, run the cables to either the right or the left and then towards the back
of the shelf as shown below.

Note
For safety reasons, do not stretch, bend, or pinch the AC power cord.

66 Installation Manual
 3.2.7 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards

Removing the Optional Service Cards

1. Turn the 2 screws anticlockwise to loosen them.

Screws

2. Pull the release lever in the direction of the arrow to disconnect the card from the back board. Pull the card
from the shelf to remove it.
Back Board

Release Lever

Installation Manual 67
3.2.8 Types of Connectors

3.2.8 Types of Connectors

Connector Type Pin Number Used for

• DHLC8 (KX-TDA0170)
RJ11
• SLC8 (KX-TDA0173)
• SLC16 (KX-TDA0174)
1
• MSLC16 (KX-TDA0175)
4
• CSLC16 (KX-TDA0177)
• LCOT8 (KX-TDA0180)
• LCOT16 (KX-TDA0181)
• LCOT4 (KX-TDA0183)
(Twisted pair cable)

RJ45 • IPCMPR
• CSIF4 (KX-TDA0143)
8 • CSIF8 (KX-TDA0144)
• T1 (KX-TDA0187)
• E1 (KX-TDA0188)
1 • BRI4 (KX-TDA0284)
• BRI8 (KX-TDA0288)
• PRI30 (KX-TDA0290CE/KX-TDA0290CJ)
(Twisted pair cable) • PRI23 (KX-TDA0290)
• IP-EXT16 (KX-TDA0470)
• IP-GW4E (KX-TDA0484)
• IP-GW16 (KX-TDA0490)
• E1 (KX-TDA0188)
BNC
• PRI30 (KX-TDA0290CE/KX-TDA0290CJ)
1

Amphenol 50 25 • DHLC8 (KX-TDA0170)

Type A Type B • DLC8 (KX-TDA0171)
• DLC16 (KX-TDA0172)
• SLC8 (KX-TDA0173)
• SLC16 (KX-TDA0174)
• MSLC16 (KX-TDA0175)
• CSLC16 (KX-TDA0177)
26 1 • LCOT8 (KX-TDA0180)
• LCOT16 (KX-TDA0181)
(Shielded twisted pair • DID8 (KX-TDA0182)
cable) • LCOT4 (KX-TDA0183)
• E&M8 (KX-TDA0184)

68 Installation Manual
 3.2.8 Types of Connectors

Connector Type Pin Number Used for

10-pin 8-pin • DPH4 (KX-TDA0161)

1
Terminal Terminal 1
• DPH2 (KX-TDA0162)
Block Block • EIO4 (KX-TDA0164)

10 8

• Basic Shelf
RS-232C
6 1

9 5

(Shielded cable)
• IPCMPR
Mini Plug

Installation Manual 69
3.2.9 Attaching a Ferrite Core

3.2.9 Attaching a Ferrite Core

A ferrite core must be attached when:
• an RJ45 connector is connected to an IPCMPR, T1, E1, PRI, BRI, IP-GW16 or IP-EXT16 cards, or
• an Amphenol connector is connected to an extension card.
Note
In Canada, the ferrite core is not necessarily required for the T1 and PRI23 cards.

Attaching to an RJ45 Connector

For the IPCMPR Card
Wrap the cable once around the ferrite core, then close the case of the ferrite core. Attach the ferrite core 3
cm away from the connector. The ferrite core is included with the PBX.

3 cm

For T1/E1/PRI/IP-GW16/IP-EXT16 Cards

Wrap the cable once around the ferrite core, then close the case of the ferrite core. Attach the ferrite core 5
cm away from the connector. The ferrite core is included with the card.

5 cm

70 Installation Manual
 3.2.9 Attaching a Ferrite Core

For a BRI Card

Attach the ferrite core, then close the case of the ferrite core. Attach the ferrite core as close to the card’s
connector as possible. The ferrite core is included with the card.

When only 1 or 2 cables are used for connection, wrap the

cable(s) once around the ferrite core.

When 3 or 4 cables are used for connection, simply pass the

cables through the ferrite core.

Note
For every 4 cables, use 1 ferrite core; a ferrite core holds a maximum of 4 cables.

Installation Manual 71
3.2.9 Attaching a Ferrite Core

Attaching to an Amphenol Connector

For Extension Cards
Pass the cable through the ferrite core, then close the case of the ferrite core. Attach the ferrite core 3 cm away
from the connector. The ferrite core is included with the card.

3 cm

If you need to open the ferrite core, use a flathead screwdriver to unlatch the case of the ferrite core.

72 Installation Manual
 3.2.10 Fastening an Amphenol Connector

3.2.10 Fastening an Amphenol Connector

An Amphenol 57JE-type connector is used on some of the optional service cards.
To connect an Amphenol connector, use the spring latch or screw to fix the upper part and use Velcro® tape
to fix the lower part of the connector.

Type A (Spring Latch + Velcro Tape) Type B (Screw + Velcro Tape)

Velcro Velcro
Tape Tape

1 Remove the
Spring screw on the
Latch optional service
card.

Spring 1 1
Latch
Insert the screw (included
with the Amphenol or
optional service card).

2 2

Installation Manual 73
3.2.10 Fastening an Amphenol Connector

Amphenol Connector Pin Assignment Chart

Below is an Amphenol connector pin assignment chart for all optional service cards that use the Amphenol
connector. For more details, refer to the appropriate section in "3.5 Information about the Physical Trunk
Cards" and "3.6 Information about the Physical Extension Cards".
Pin No.

74 Installation Manual
 3.2.11 Wall Mounting (KX-TDE200)

3.2.11 Wall Mounting (KX-TDE200)

WARNING
• Make sure that the wall that the shelf will be attached to is strong enough to support the shelf.
If not, it is necessary for the wall to be reinforced.
• Only use the wall-mounting equipment (anchor plugs, screws, metal bracket) included with the
PBX.

CAUTION
• When placing the metal bracket, make sure that the "TOP" arrow is pointing upward.
• Do not block the openings of the shelf. Allow space of at least 20 cm above and 10 cm at the sides of
the shelf.
• Make sure that the surface behind the shelf is flat and free of obstacles, so that the openings on the
back of the shelf will not be blocked.
• Make sure that the surface behind the shelf is not made of wood.

Notice
• When driving the screws into the wall, be careful to avoid touching any metal laths, wire laths or metal
plates in the wall.
• When this product is no longer in use, make sure to detach it from the wall.
• Be careful not to drop the shelf.

Note
• Make sure to remove the front cover from each shelf before installing the shelves (refer
to "3.2.3 Opening/Closing the Front Cover").
• Do not install any optional service cards or a PSU in the shelves before installation.
• For details about the dimensions and weight of the PBX, refer to "1.4.1 General Description".

Installation Manual 75
3.2.11 Wall Mounting (KX-TDE200)

1. Install 4 anchor plugs in the wall, using the metal bracket as a template. Fix the metal bracket with 4 screws
(A).

Anchor Plug Wall Hammer Anchor Plug

Metal Bracket 8 mm

30 mm

Screw (A)

Metal Bracket
Screw (A)

Drive the
screw
to this point.

2. Hook the shelf onto the metal bracket, making sure that the shelf slides down and onto the hooked parts
of the metal bracket. Use 2 screws (B) to fix both sides of the shelf.

TOP

Screw (B)

76 Installation Manual
 3.2.12 Wall Mounting (KX-TDE100)

3.2.12 Wall Mounting (KX-TDE100)

WARNING
• Make sure that the wall that the shelf will be attached to is strong enough to support the shelf.
If not, it is necessary for the wall to be reinforced.
• Only use the wall-mounting equipment (anchor plugs, screws, metal bracket) included with the
PBX.

CAUTION
• When placing the metal bracket, make sure that the "TOP" arrow is pointing upward.
• Do not block the openings of the shelf. Allow space of at least 20 cm above and 10 cm at the sides of
the shelf.
• Make sure that the surface behind the shelf is flat and free of obstacles, so that the openings on the
back of the shelf will not be blocked.
• Make sure that the surface behind the shelf is not made of wood.

Notice
• When driving the screws into the wall, be careful to avoid touching any metal laths, wire laths or metal
plates in the wall.
• When this product is no longer in use, make sure to detach it from the wall.
• Be careful not to drop the shelf.

Note
• Make sure to remove the front cover from each shelf before installing the shelves (refer
to "3.2.3 Opening/Closing the Front Cover").
• Do not install any optional service cards or a PSU in the shelves before installation.
• For details about the dimensions and weight of the PBX, refer to "1.4.1 General Description".

Installation Manual 77
3.2.12 Wall Mounting (KX-TDE100)

1. Install 3 anchor plugs in the wall, using the metal bracket as a template. Fix the metal bracket with 3 screws
(A).
Anchor Plug
Hammer Anchor Plug

Wall 8 mm

Metal Bracket 30 mm
TOP

Screw (A) TOP

Screw (A)

Metal Bracket

Drive the
screw
to this point.

2. Hook the shelf onto the metal bracket, making sure that the shelf slides down and onto the hooked parts
of the metal bracket. Use 2 screws (B) to fix both sides of the shelf.

TOP

Screw (B)

78 Installation Manual
 3.2.13 Floor Standing (KX-TDE200 Only)

3.2.13 Floor Standing (KX-TDE200 Only)

CAUTION
• Do not block the openings of the shelf. Allow space of at least 20 cm above and 10 cm at the sides of
the shelf.
• Make sure that the surface behind the shelf is flat and free of obstacles, so that the openings on the
back of the shelf will not be blocked.
• Make sure that the surface behind the shelf is not made of wood.

Notice
Be careful not to drop the shelf.

1. Install 4 anchor plugs in the floor, using the metal bracket as a template. Fix the metal bracket with 4 screws
(A).

Screw (A) Metal Bracket

TOP

Screw (A)

Anchor Hammer
Plug
Anchor Metal
Plug Bracket

30 mm

Floor
8 mm

2. Remove the front cover of the shelf (refer to "3.2.3 Opening/Closing the Front Cover").

Installation Manual 79
3.2.13 Floor Standing (KX-TDE200 Only)

3. Lift the shelf, attach it to the metal bracket, slide it backwards until it locks, and retain it with 2 screws (B).

TOP

FRONT

Screws (B)
Metal Bracket

4. Fix the front cover on the shelf (refer to "3.2.3 Opening/Closing the Front Cover").

80 Installation Manual
 3.2.14 Surge Protector Installation

3.2.14 Surge Protector Installation

CAUTION
Performing surge protection is essential. Make sure to follow the instructions in this section.

Overview
A massive electrical surge can be caused if lightning strikes a telephone cable 10 m above ground, or if a
telephone line comes into contact with a power line. A surge protector is a device that is connected to a trunk
to prevent potentially dangerous electrical surges from entering the building via the trunk and damaging the
PBX and connected equipment.

To protect the system from electrical surges, we strongly recommend connecting the system to a surge
protector that meets the following specifications:
– Surge arrestor type: 3-electrode arrestor
– DC spark-over voltage: 230 V
– Maximum peak current: at least 10 kA
Additionally, proper earthing is very important for the protection of the system (refer to "3.2.5 Frame Earth
Connection").

Many countries/areas have regulations requiring surge protection. Be sure to comply with all applicable laws,
regulations, and guidelines.

Installation
Trunk Trunk Trunk

Surge
Protector
Terminal
Board
Extn. PBX

Extn.
SLT
PT CS Frame
PT-interface CS Earth

Earth
Extn.: Extension line

Installation Manual 81
3.2.14 Surge Protector Installation

Outside Installation
(Main Building)

Surge Protector
Trunk
(Another Building)
Trunk

SLT
Extn. PT
PT-interface CS
Terminal PBX
Board Surge
Extn.
Protector CS
Extn.
Extn.

SLT
PT CS
PT-interface CS
Earth

Extn.: Extension Line

If you install an extension outside of the building, the following precautions are recommended:
a. Install the extension wire underground.
b. Use a conduit to protect the wire.
Note
The surge protector for an extension and CS is different from that for trunks.

Installation of an Earth Rod

Surge Protector

Trunk

Earthing
Wire PBX

(Underground)
Earth Rod

82 Installation Manual
 3.2.14 Surge Protector Installation

1. Connect the earth rod to the surge protector using an earthing wire with a cross-sectional area of at least
1.3 mm2.
2. Bury the earth rod near the protector. The earthing wire should be as short as possible.
3. The earthing wire should run straight to the earth rod. Do not run the wire around other objects.
4. Bury the earth rod at least 50 cm underground.
Note
• The above figures are recommendations only.
• The length of earth rod and the required depth depend on the composition of the soil.

Installation Manual 83
3.3.1 IPCMPR Card

3.3 Information about the Main Processing Card

3.3.1 IPCMPR Card

Function
The IPCMPR card is the preinstalled main processing card with built-in SVM feature (2-channel). The Virtual
Cards (trunk/extension) can be installed in Virtual Slots of the IPCMPR card and can be activated with the
activation keys. Also, the IPCMPR supports LAN connection so that IP telephones (IP-PTs, IP softphones, SIP
Extensions) and PCs can be connected on a private IP network.

Mountable Cards
• Either one of the DSP16 or DSP64 cards (refer to "3.3.2 DSP16 Card (KX-TDE0110) and DSP64 Card
(KX-TDE0111)" )
• RMT card (refer to "3.3.3 RMT Card (KX-TDA0196)" )

2
SD
CARD

LEDs
SD Memory Card Slot
Cover
Reset Button SD
System Initialise Switch Memory
Card 3
SD
CARD

MNT Port
LAN Port
BGM/MOH
Pager
4
MPR ID Number SD
CARD

MNT Port
5

To PC

To LAN LEDs
LAN Port

WARNING
A lithium battery is used in the IPCMPR card. There is a risk of explosion if the battery is replaced
with the incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

84 Installation Manual
 3.3.1 IPCMPR Card

CAUTION
• The SD Memory Card contains software for all the processes of the PBX and all the customer data. It
can be easily removed and taken away from the PBX by a third party. Therefore, do not allow
unauthorised access to prevent data leakage.
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card while power is supplied to the PBX. Doing so may cause the PBX
to fail to start when you try to restart the system.
• To prevent data leakage, render the SD Memory Card physically unusable before disposal.

Notice
• Use only the SD Memory Card included with the PBX.
• The SD Memory Card must be inserted in the SD Memory Card slot of the IPCMPR card before startup.

Note
• Make sure to use the MNT port for PC connection, and the LAN port for LAN connection.
• The maximum length of the cable to be connected to the IPCMPR card is 100 m.
• When connecting the RJ45 connector, attach the ferrite core included with the PBX. Refer
to "3.2.9 Attaching a Ferrite Core".
• For details about Virtual Slots, refer to "1.4.3 System Capacity".
• For details about the activation keys, refer to "2.1 Information about the Activation Keys".
• For details about connecting to a LAN, refer to "3.14 LAN Connection".
• For details about connecting peripherals, refer to "3.13.1 Connection of Peripherals".
• For details about System Initialise Switch, refer to "3.16.1 Starting the PBX".
• For details about Reset Button, refer to "5.1.4 Using the Reset Button".

Pin Assignments
MNT Port/LAN Port (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
No. Signal Name Input (I)/Output (O) Function

1 1 TPO+ O Transmit data+

2 TPO- O Transmit data-
8 3 TPI+ I Receive data+
4-5 Reserved – –
6 TPI- I Receive data-
7-8 Reserved – –

LED Indications
Indication Colour Description

BATT ALARM Red Battery alarm indication

• OFF: Normal
ON: Alarm
SD ACCESS Green SD memory card status
• ON: Accessing

Installation Manual 85
3.3.1 IPCMPR Card

Indication Colour Description

10BASE-T/100BASE-TX MNT 2 LINK Green Link status indication

• OFF: Off-line
• ON: Linked normally
• Flashing: In communication
100 Yellow Data transmission speed indication
• OFF: 10 Mbps
• ON: 100 Mbps
LAN 1 LINK Green Link status indication
• OFF: Off-line
• ON: Linked normally
• Flashing: In communication
100 Yellow Data transmission speed indication
• OFF: 10 Mbps
• ON: 100 Mbps

86 Installation Manual
 3.3.2 DSP16 Card (KX-TDE0110) and DSP64 Card (KX-TDE0111)

3.3.2 DSP16 Card (KX-TDE0110) and DSP64 Card (KX-TDE0111)

Function
DSP16: 16-channel digital signal processor card with a 4-Channel IP Trunk activation key and a
8-Channel IP Proprietary Telephone activation key preinstalled. Compliant with ITU-T G.
729A and G.711 CODEC methods. To be mounted on the IPCMPR card.
DSP64: 64-channel digital signal processor card with four 4-Channel IP Trunk activation keys and
four 8-Channel IP Proprietary Telephone activation keys preinstalled. Compliant with
ITU-T G.729A and G.711 CODEC methods. To be mounted on the IPCMPR card.

inside

Screw
DSP16 Card/
DSP64 Card

Accessories and User-supplied Items

Accessories (included): Screws ´ 3
User-supplied (not included): none

Note
• Depending on the number and the type of IP trunks and IP telephones you wish to use, required
activation keys are determined, and either the DSP16 or DSP64 card is selected to be installed.
• If the preinstalled activation keys on the DSP16 or DSP64 cards are not enough for the desired
configuration, you need to purchase activation key codes. For details about the activation keys, refer
to "2.1 Information about the Activation Keys".

Installation Manual 87
3.3.2 DSP16 Card (KX-TDE0110) and DSP64 Card (KX-TDE0111)

• When installing the DSP16 or DSP64 card, hold down the shaded areas of the card to connect it firmly.

88 Installation Manual
 3.3.3 RMT Card (KX-TDA0196)

3.3.3 RMT Card (KX-TDA0196)

Function
Analogue modem card for remote communication with the PBX. ITU-T V.90 support. To be mounted on the
IPCMPR card.

IPCMPR Card

inside

RMT Card Screw

Accessories and User-supplied Items

Accessories (included): Screws ´ 2
User-supplied (not included): none

Installation Manual 89
3.4.1 Virtual Cards

3.4 Information about the Virtual Cards

3.4.1 Virtual Cards

Function
Virtual Cards are included with the IPCMPR card and can be activated with the appropriate activation key. By
installing Virtual Cards in the Virtual Slots of the IPCMPR card using the Maintenance Console, IP trunks and
IP extensions can be used via the IPCMPR card.

Virtual Card Description

Virtual 16-Channel VoIP Gateway Card Virtual Card for 16-channel H.323 trunk. Compliant with VoIP H.
(V-IPGW16) 323 V.5 protocol, and ITU-T G.729A and G.711 CODEC
methods. Also supports T.38 protocol.
Virtual 16-Channel SIP Trunk Card Virtual Card for 16-channel SIP trunk. Compliant with RFC 3261,
(V-SIPGW16) 3262, 3264, 3311, 3581, 3960 and 4028 protocols, and ITU-T
G.729AB and G.711 CODEC methods. Also supports T.38
protocol.
Virtual 32-Channel VoIP Extension Card Virtual Card for 32 VoIP extensions. Compliant with Panasonic
(V-IPEXT32) proprietary protocol, and ITU-T G.729A, G.711 and G.722
CODEC methods.
Virtual 32-Channel SIP Extension Card Virtual Card for 32 SIP Extensions. Compliant with RFC 3261,
(V-SIPEXT32) 3264, 3310, 2327, and 4028 protocols, and ITU-T G.729A, G.
711 and G.722 CODEC methods.

Example: Virtual Cards in the Virtual Slots

Virtual Trunk Virtual Extension

Slots Slots

IPCMPR Card

Virtual Slots

90 Installation Manual
 3.5.1 LCOT4 Card (KX-TDA0183), LCOT8 Card (KX-TDA0180), and LCOT16 Card (KX-TDA0181)

3.5 Information about the Physical Trunk Cards

3.5.1 LCOT4 Card (KX-TDA0183), LCOT8 Card (KX-TDA0180), and

LCOT16 Card (KX-TDA0181)
Function
LCOT4: 4-port analogue trunk card with 2 power failure transfer (PFT) ports.
LCOT8: 8-port analogue trunk card with 2 power failure transfer (PFT) ports. One CID8 or CID/
PAY8 card can be mounted on the LCOT8 card (refer to "3.5.3 CID/PAY8 Card
(KX-TDA0189)" and "3.5.4 CID8 Card (KX-TDA0193)").
LCOT16: 16-port analogue trunk card with 4 power failure transfer (PFT) ports. A maximum of 2
CID8 cards, 2 CID/PAY8 cards, or one of each can be mounted on the LCOT16 card (refer
to "3.5.3 CID/PAY8 Card (KX-TDA0189)" and "3.5.4 CID8 Card (KX-TDA0193)").

LED

Amphenol

To trunk

Accessories and User-supplied Items

Accessories (included): Screws ´ 2
User-supplied (not included): Amphenol connector

Note
• To connect the Amphenol connector, refer to "3.2.10 Fastening an Amphenol Connector".
• For details about power failure transfer, refer to "3.15.1 Power Failure Connections".
• To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "3.16.1 Starting the
PBX".

Installation Manual 91
3.5.1 LCOT4 Card (KX-TDA0183), LCOT8 Card (KX-TDA0180), and LCOT16 Card (KX-TDA0181)

Pin Assignments
Amphenol Connector
No. Signal Name Function No. Signal Name Function
50 25 1 RA Ring port 1 26 TA Tip port 1
2 RB Ring port 2 27 TB Tip port 2
3 RC Ring port 3 28 TC Tip port 3
4 RD Ring port 4 29 TD Tip port 4
5 RE Ring port 5 30 TE Tip port 5
26 1 6 RF Ring port 6 31 TF Tip port 6
7 RG Ring port 7 32 TG Tip port 7
8 RH Ring port 8 33 TH Tip port 8
9 RI Ring port 9 34 TI Tip port 9
10 RJ Ring port 10 35 TJ Tip port 10
11 RK Ring port 11 36 TK Tip port 11
12 RL Ring port 12 37 TL Tip port 12
13 RM Ring port 13 38 TM Tip port 13
14 RN Ring port 14 39 TN Tip port 14
15 RO Ring port 15 40 TO Tip port 15
16 RP Ring port 16 41 TP Tip port 16
17-25 Reserved – 42-50 Reserved –

Note
• Pin assignments for the pins 5 to 8 and 30 to 33 are for the LCOT8 and LCOT16 card only.
• Pin assignments for the pins 9 to 16 and 34 to 41 are for the LCOT16 card only.

LED Indications
Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS Green/Red Card status indication

• OFF: Power Off
• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)
• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)
• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)
• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service

92 Installation Manual
 3.5.2 DID8 Card (KX-TDA0182)

3.5.2 DID8 Card (KX-TDA0182)

Function
8-port DID trunk card.

LED

Amphenol

To DID line

Accessories and User-supplied Items

Accessories (included): Screws ´ 2
User-supplied (not included): Amphenol connector

Note
• To connect the Amphenol connector, refer to "3.2.10 Fastening an Amphenol Connector".
• To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "3.16.1 Starting the
PBX".

Pin Assignments
Amphenol Connector
No. Signal Name Function No. Signal Name Function
50 25 1 RA Ring port 1 26 TA Tip port 1
2 RB Ring port 2 27 TB Tip port 2
3 RC Ring port 3 28 TC Tip port 3
4 RD Ring port 4 29 TD Tip port 4
5 RE Ring port 5 30 TE Tip port 5
26 1 6 RF Ring port 6 31 TF Tip port 6
7 RG Ring port 7 32 TG Tip port 7
8 RH Ring port 8 33 TH Tip port 8
9-25 Reserved – 34-50 Reserved –

Installation Manual 93
3.5.2 DID8 Card (KX-TDA0182)

LED Indications
Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS Green/Red Card status indication

• OFF: Power Off
• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)
• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)
• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)
• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service

94 Installation Manual
 3.5.3 CID/PAY8 Card (KX-TDA0189)

3.5.3 CID/PAY8 Card (KX-TDA0189)

Function
8-port Caller ID signal type FSK/FSK (with Call Waiting Caller ID [Visual Caller ID])/DTMF, and 8-port Pay
Tone Service (12 kHz/16 kHz). To be mounted on the LCOT8/LCOT16 cards.
Set all DIP switches for ports
09-16 at "OFF" positions
(LCOT16 card only).

inside
OFF

OFF
SW2

SW2
ON

ON

Ports 09-16

CID/PAY8 Card

Screw

Ports 01-08

SW1 SW1
ON

ON

Set all DIP switches for

OFF

OFF

ports 01-08 at "OFF"

positions.

Accessories and User-supplied Items

Accessories (included): Screws ´ 2
User-supplied (not included): none

Note
Only 1 CID/PAY8 card can be mounted on the LCOT8 card.

Switch Settings (on LCOT8/LCOT16 cards)

Switch Type Usage and Status Definition

Port Setting DIP Set all DIP switches at "OFF" positions.

Note
SW2 is for the LCOT16 card only.

Installation Manual 95
3.5.4 CID8 Card (KX-TDA0193)

3.5.4 CID8 Card (KX-TDA0193)

Function
8-port Caller ID signal type FSK/FSK (with Call Waiting Caller ID [Visual Caller ID])/DTMF. To be mounted on
the LCOT8/LCOT16 cards.
LCOT16 card only
inside
OFF
SW2

ON

CID8 Card

Screw

SW1
ON
OFF

Accessories and User-supplied Items

Accessories (included): Screws ´ 2
User-supplied (not included): none

Note
Only 1 CID8 card can be mounted on the LCOT8 card.

Switch Settings (on LCOT8/LCOT16 cards)

Switch Type Usage and Status Definition

Port Setting DIP Keep all DIP switches at default "ON" positions. Do not change the
positions of these switches.

Note
SW2 is for the LCOT16 card only.

96 Installation Manual
 3.5.5 E&M8 Card (KX-TDA0184)

3.5.5 E&M8 Card (KX-TDA0184)

Function
8-port E & M (TIE) trunk card. Type 5 support.

LED

Amphenol

To terminal board from the E & M (TIE) line

Accessories and User-supplied Items

Accessories (included): Screws ´ 2
User-supplied (not included): Amphenol connector

Note
• Connect this optional service card to the trunk through terminal board from the E & M (TIE) line; do not
connect to the trunk directly.
• To connect the Amphenol connector, refer to "3.2.10 Fastening an Amphenol Connector".
• To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "3.16.1 Starting the
PBX".

Pin Assignments
Amphenol Connector
No. Signal Name Function No. Signal Name Function
50 25 1 TA Tip port 1 26 RA Ring port 1
2 T1A Tip 1 port 1 27 R1A Ring 1 port 1
3 EA E line port 1 28 MA M line port 1
4 SGA SG line port 1 29 SGB SG line port 2
5 TB Tip port 2 30 RB Ring port 2
26 1 6 T1B Tip 1 port 2 31 R1B Ring 1 port 2
7 EB E line port 2 32 MB M line port 2
8 TC Tip port 3 33 RC Ring port 3

Installation Manual 97
3.5.5 E&M8 Card (KX-TDA0184)

No. Signal Name Function No. Signal Name Function

9 T1C Tip 1 port 3 34 R1C Ring 1 port 3

10 EC E line port 3 35 MC M line port 3
11 TD Tip port 4 36 RD Ring port 4
12 T1D Tip 1 port 4 37 R1D Ring 1 port 4
13 ED E line port 4 38 MD M line port 4
14 TE Tip port 5 39 RE Ring port 5
15 T1E Tip 1 port 5 40 R1E Ring 1 port 5
16 EE E line port 5 41 ME M line port 5
17 TF Tip port 6 42 RF Ring port 6
18 T1F Tip 1 port 6 43 R1F Ring 1 port 6
19 EF E line port 6 44 MF M line port 6
20 TG Tip port 7 45 RG Ring port 7
21 T1G Tip 1 port 7 46 R1G Ring 1 port 7
22 EG E line port 7 47 MG M line port 7
23 TH Tip port 8 48 RH Ring port 8
24 T1H Tip 1 port 8 49 R1H Ring 1 port 8
25 EH E line port 8 50 MH M line port 8

LED Indications
Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS Green/Red Card status indication

• OFF: Power Off
• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)
• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)
• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)
• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service

98 Installation Manual
 3.5.6 T1 Card (KX-TDA0187)

3.5.6 T1 Card (KX-TDA0187)

Function
1-port T1 trunk card. EIA/TIA standard compliant.

A
LEDs

B
RJ45

To NT1 / Extension

Accessories and User-supplied Items

Accessories (included): Ferrite core ´ 1
User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector

CAUTION
• When connecting this optional service card to the trunk, connect through NT1; do not connect to the
trunk directly.
• T1 ports are SELV ports and should only be connected to SELV services.

Notice
When connecting the RJ45 connector, attach the included ferrite core (except in Canada, where the ferrite
core is not necessarily required). Refer to "3.2.9 Attaching a Ferrite Core".

Note
• This optional service card can be used for either trunk or extension connection, by setting the A/B
switch or using the connector with appropriate pin assignments.
• To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "3.16.1 Starting the
PBX".

Switch Settings
Switch Type Usage and Status Definition

A/B Slide Select A (default) for trunk or B for extension use.

Installation Manual 99
3.5.6 T1 Card (KX-TDA0187)

Pin Assignments
RJ45 Connector for Trunk Use
No. Signal Name Level [V] Function

1 RX+ (+) Receive data (+)

8
2 RX- (-) Receive data (-)
1 3 Reserved – –
4 TX- (-) Transmit data (-)
5 TX+ (+) Transmit data (+)
6-8 Reserved – –

RJ45 Connector for Extension Use

No. Signal Name Level [V] Function

1 TX- (-) Transmit data (-)

8
2 TX+ (+) Transmit data (+)
1 3 Reserved – –
4 RX+ (+) Receive data (+)
5 RX- (-) Receive data (-)
6-8 Reserved – –

LED Indications
Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS Green/Red Card status indication

• OFF: Power Off
• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)
• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)
• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)
• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service
SYNC-ERR Red Non-synchronisation status indication
• OFF: Normal
• ON: Out of synchronisation
RAI Red RAI signal status indication
• OFF: Normal
• ON: Alarm (Clock Slave)
• Flashing (60 times per minute): Alarm (Clock Master)
AIS Red AIS status indication
• OFF: Normal
• ON: Alarm

100 Installation Manual

 3.5.6 T1 Card (KX-TDA0187)

Indication Colour Description

SYNC Green Synchronisation status indication

• OFF: Not synchronised
• ON: Synchronised
• Flashing (60 times per minute): Synchronised (Clock Master)

Maximum Cabling Distance of Extension Connection

The maximum length of the extension cable that connects the T1 cards is shown below:

Diameter Maximum Distance

0.5 mm: 200 m

Installation Manual 101

3.5.7 E1 Card (KX-TDA0188)

3.5.7 E1 Card (KX-TDA0188)

Function
1-port E1 trunk card. ITU-T standard compliant.

A
LEDs

B
RJ45
BNC (TX) outer conductor
J308 J308
OR
3 3
1 2 1 2
To NT1/Extension

To NT1/Extension For Frame For Frame

Ground Open Ground Short
For RJ45
BNC (TX)
3

3
J309

J309
BNC (RX) 2 1
OR

2 1
120Ω 120Ω
OR
For BNC 75Ω 75Ω
BNC (RX) outer conductor

Accessories and User-supplied Items

Accessories (included): Ferrite core ´ 1
User-supplied (not included): RJ45 or BNC connector

CAUTION
• When connecting this optional service card to the trunk, connect through NT1; do not connect to the
trunk directly.
• E1 ports are SELV ports and should only be connected to SELV services.

Notice
When connecting the RJ45 connector, attach the included ferrite core. Refer to "3.2.9 Attaching a Ferrite
Core".

Note
• In some countries/areas, this optional service card must not be connected to the Public Switched
Telephone Network.
• Use only 1 type of connector (RJ45 or BNC) for connection; RJ45 and BNC cannot be used
simultaneously.
• This optional service card can be used for either trunk or extension connection, by setting the A/B
switch or using the connector with appropriate pin assignments.
• To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "3.16.1 Starting the
PBX".

102 Installation Manual

 3.5.7 E1 Card (KX-TDA0188)

Switch Settings
Switch Type Usage and Status Definition

Termination Slide Select 120 W (default) or 75 W to match the connector type to be

used.
A/B Slide When using an RJ45 connector, select A (default) for trunk or B for
extension use.
When using BNC connectors, make sure that A is selected.
Frame Ground Short pin J308 is for BNC (TX) outer conductor, and J309 is for BNC (RX) outer
Short conductor.

Connection of 1 and 2: Open (default)

Connection of 2 and 3: Short

Pin Assignments
RJ45 Connector for Trunk Use
No. Signal Name Level [V] Function

1 RX+ (+) Receive data (+)

8
2 RX- (-) Receive data (-)
1 3 Reserved – –
4 TX- (-) Transmit data (-)
5 TX+ (+) Transmit data (+)
6-8 Reserved – –

RJ45 Connector for Extension use

No. Signal Name Level [V] Function

1 TX- (-) Transmit data (-)

8
2 TX+ (+) Transmit data (+)
1 3 Reserved – –
4 RX+ (+) Receive data (+)
5 RX- (-) Receive data (-)
6-8 Reserved – –

BNC (coaxial) Connector (TX)

No. Signal Name Level [V] Function

1 1 TX+ (+) Transmit data (+)

2
2 TX- (-) Transmit data (-)

Installation Manual 103

3.5.7 E1 Card (KX-TDA0188)

BNC (coaxial) Connector (RX)

No. Signal Name Level [V] Function

1 1 RX- (-) Receive data (-)

2
2 RX+ (+) Receive data (+)

LED Indications
Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS Green/Red Card status indication

• OFF: Power Off
• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)
• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)
• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)
• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service
SYNC-ERR Red Non-synchronisation status indication
• OFF: Normal
• ON: Out of synchronisation
RAI Red RAI signal status indication
• OFF: Normal
• ON: Alarm (Clock Slave)
• Flashing (60 times per minute): Alarm (Clock Master)
AIS Red AIS status indication
• OFF: Normal
• ON: Alarm
SYNC Green Synchronisation status indication
• OFF: Not synchronised
• ON: Synchronised
• Flashing (60 times per minute): Synchronised (Clock Master)

Maximum Cabling Distance of Extension Connection

The maximum length of the extension cable that connects the E1 cards is shown below:

Diameter Maximum Distance

0.5 mm: 200 m

104 Installation Manual

 3.5.8 BRI4 Card (KX-TDA0284) and BRI8 Card (KX-TDA0288)

3.5.8 BRI4 Card (KX-TDA0284) and BRI8 Card (KX-TDA0288)

Function
BRI4: 4-port ISDN Basic Rate Interface card with 1 power failure transfer port. EURO-ISDN/ETSI
compliant.
BRI8: 8-port ISDN Basic Rate Interface card with 1 power failure transfer port. EURO-ISDN/ETSI
compliant.

LEDs B A

RJ45
(LINE 1 to LINE 8)

To NT1/ Extension

Accessories and User-supplied Items

Accessories (included): Ferrite core(s) ´ 1 (BRI4 card) or 2 (BRI8 card)
User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector

CAUTION
• If the connected ISDN terminal has no external power source, make sure that the power is supplied
from the BRI4/BRI8 card by programming the PBX accordingly.
However, if there is an external power source to the terminal, make sure that there is no power supplied
to the terminal from the BRI4/BRI8 card. Failure to do so may cause damage to the power supply circuit
of the BRI4/BRI8 card or the terminal.
• When connecting these optional service cards to the trunk, connect through an NT1; do not connect
to the U interface of the trunk directly.

Notice
When connecting the RJ45 connector, attach the included ferrite core. Refer to "3.2.9 Attaching a Ferrite
Core".

Note
• LINE 5 to LINE 8 are for BRI8 card only.
• These optional service cards have 100 W of terminal resistance. For use in point to multi-point
connection, the cards must be placed at the end of the bus.
• These optional service cards can be used for either trunk or extension connection, by setting the A/B
switch or using the connector with appropriate pin assignments.
• For details about power failure transfer, refer to "3.15.1 Power Failure Connections".
• To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "3.16.1 Starting the
PBX".

Installation Manual 105

3.5.8 BRI4 Card (KX-TDA0284) and BRI8 Card (KX-TDA0288)

Switch Settings
Switch Type Usage and Status Definition

A/B Slide Select A (default) for trunk or B for extension use.

Pin Assignments
RJ45 Connector for Trunk Use
No. Signal Name Level [V] Function

1-2 Reserved – –
8
3 TX1 (+) Transmit data 1
1 4 RX2 (+) Receive data 2
5 RX1 (-) Receive data 1
6 TX2 (-) Transmit data 2
7-8 Reserved – –

RJ45 Connector for Extension Use

No. Signal Name Level [V] Function

1-2 Reserved – –
8
3 RX2 (+) Receive data 2
1 4 TX1 (+) Transmit data 1
5 TX2 (-) Transmit data 2
6 RX1 (-) Receive data 1
7-8 Reserved – –

LED Indications
Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS Green/Red Card status indication

• OFF: Power Off
• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)
• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)
• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)
• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service

106 Installation Manual

 3.5.8 BRI4 Card (KX-TDA0284) and BRI8 Card (KX-TDA0288)

Indication Colour Description

LINE 8 Green Line status indication (LINE 1 to LINE 8):

LINE 7 Refer to "LINE LED Pattern" below for details.
LINE 6
LINE 5 Note
LINE 4 LINE 5 to LINE 8 are for BRI8 card only.
LINE 3
LINE 2
LINE 1

LINE LED Pattern

Layer 1 Layer 2 Master Clock LED Pattern

OFF OFF OFF 1s

ON OFF OFF 1s

ON ON OFF 1s

ON OFF ON 1s

ON ON ON 1s

Layer 1: ON (Synchronous)
Layer 2: ON (Link established)/OFF (Link not established)
Master Clock: ON (Master)/OFF (Slave)

Installation Manual 107

3.5.8 BRI4 Card (KX-TDA0284) and BRI8 Card (KX-TDA0288)

Maximum Cabling Distance of S0 Bus Connection

The maximum length of the extension cable that connects the PBX and the ISDN terminal equipment (TE) is
shown below:
CAT 5: Under 1000 m
Point-to-Point

TE
CAT 5: Under 150 m
Point-to-Multipoint

TE 1 TE 8

CAT 5: Under 500 m CAT 5: Under 50 m Expansion

Point-to-Multipoint

TE 1 TE 8

108 Installation Manual

 3.5.9 PRI30 Card (KX-TDA0290CE/KX-TDA0290CJ)

3.5.9 PRI30 Card (KX-TDA0290CE/KX-TDA0290CJ)

Function
1-port ISDN Primary Rate Interface card (30B channels). EURO-ISDN/ETSI compliant.

LEDs

A
B
RJ45

To NT1 / Extension

To NT1/Extension

For RJ45
BNC (TX)
BNC (RX)
120Ω 120Ω
OR
For BNC 75Ω 75Ω

Accessories and User-supplied Items

Accessories (included): Ferrite core ´ 1
User-supplied (not included): RJ45 or BNC connector

CAUTION
• When connecting this optional service card to the trunk, connect through an NT1; do not connect to
the U interface of the trunk directly.
• PRI ports are SELV ports and should only be connected to SELV services.

Notice
When connecting the RJ45 connector, attach the included ferrite core. Refer to "3.2.9 Attaching a Ferrite
Core".

Note
• In some countries/areas, this optional service card must not be connected to the Public Switched
Telephone Network.
• Use only 1 type of connector (RJ45 or BNC) for connection; RJ45 and BNC cannot be used
simultaneously.
• This optional service card can be used for either trunk or extension connection, by setting the A/B
switch or using the connector with appropriate pin assignments.
• To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "3.16.1 Starting the
PBX".

Installation Manual 109

3.5.9 PRI30 Card (KX-TDA0290CE/KX-TDA0290CJ)

Switch Settings
Switch Type Usage and Status Definition

Termination Slide Select 120 W (default) or 75 W to match the connector type to be

used.
A/B Slide When using an RJ45 connector, select A (default) for trunk or B for
extension use.
When using BNC connectors, make sure that A is selected.

Pin Assignments
RJ45 Connector for Trunk Use
No. Signal Name Level [V] Function

1 RX+ (+) Receive data (+)

8
2 RX- (-) Receive data (-)
1 3 Reserved – –
4 TX- (-) Transmit data (-)
5 TX+ (+) Transmit data (+)
6-8 Reserved – –

RJ45 Connector for Extension Use

No. Signal Name Level [V] Function

1 TX- (-) Transmit data (-)

8
2 TX+ (+) Transmit data (+)
1 3 Reserved – –
4 RX+ (+) Receive data (+)
5 RX- (-) Receive data (-)
6-8 Reserved – –

BNC (coaxial) Connector (TX)

No. Signal Name Level [V] Function

1 1 TX+ (+) Transmit data (+)

2
2 TX- (-) Transmit data (-)

BNC (coaxial) Connector (RX)

No. Signal Name Level [V] Function

1 1 RX- (-) Receive data (-)

2
2 RX+ (+) Receive data (+)

110 Installation Manual

 3.5.9 PRI30 Card (KX-TDA0290CE/KX-TDA0290CJ)

LED Indications
Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS Green/Red Card status indication

• OFF: Power Off
• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)
• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)
• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)
• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service
SYNC-ERR Red Non-synchronisation status indication
• OFF: Normal
• ON: Out of synchronisation
RAI Red RAI signal status indication
• OFF: Normal
• ON: Alarm (Clock Slave)
• Flashing (60 times per minute): Alarm (Clock Master)
AIS Red AIS status indication
• OFF: Normal
• ON: Alarm
SYNC Green Synchronisation status indication
• OFF: Not synchronised
• ON: Synchronised
• Flashing (60 times per minute): Synchronised (Clock Master)
D-LINK Green Data link status indication
• OFF: Not established
• ON: Established

Maximum Cabling Distance of Extension Connection

The maximum length of the extension cable that connects the PRI30 cards is shown below:

Diameter Maximum Distance

0.5 mm: 200 m

Installation Manual 111

3.5.10 PRI23 Card (KX-TDA0290)

3.5.10 PRI23 Card (KX-TDA0290)

Function
1-port ISDN Primary Rate Interface card (23B channels). NI (North American standard ISDN protocol)
compliant.

LEDs

A
B
RJ45

To NT1/ Extension

Accessories and User-supplied Items

Accessories (included): Ferrite core ´ 1
User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector

CAUTION
• When connecting this optional service card to the trunk, connect through an NT1; do not connect to
the U interface of the trunk directly.
• PRI ports are SELV ports and should only be connected to SELV services.

Notice
When connecting the RJ45 connector, attach the included ferrite core (except in Canada, where the ferrite
core is not necessarily required). Refer to "3.2.9 Attaching a Ferrite Core".

Note
• This optional service card can be used for either trunk or extension connection, by setting the A/B
switch or using the connector with appropriate pin assignments.
• To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "3.16.1 Starting the
PBX".

Switch Settings
Switch Type Usage and Status Definition

A/B Slide Select A (default) for trunk or B for extension use.

112 Installation Manual

 3.5.10 PRI23 Card (KX-TDA0290)

Pin Assignments
RJ45 Connector for Trunk Use
No. Signal Name Level [V] Function

1 RX+ (+) Receive data (+)

8
2 RX- (-) Receive data (-)
1 3 Reserved – –
4 TX- (-) Transmit data (-)
5 TX+ (+) Transmit data (+)
6-8 Reserved – –

RJ45 Connector for Extension Use

No. Signal Name Level [V] Function

1 TX- (-) Transmit data (-)

8
2 TX+ (+) Transmit data (+)
1 3 Reserved – –
4 RX+ (+) Receive data (+)
5 RX- (-) Receive data (-)
6-8 Reserved – –

LED Indications
Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS Green/Red Card status indication

• OFF: Power Off
• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)
• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)
• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)
• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service
SYNC-ERR Red Non-synchronisation status indication
• OFF: Normal
• ON: Out of synchronisation
RAI Red RAI signal status indication
• OFF: Normal
• ON: Alarm (Clock Slave)
• Flashing (60 times per minute): Alarm (Clock Master)
AIS Red AIS status indication
• OFF: Normal
• ON: Alarm

Installation Manual 113

3.5.10 PRI23 Card (KX-TDA0290)

Indication Colour Description

SYNC Green Synchronisation status indication

• OFF: Not synchronised
• ON: Synchronised
• Flashing (60 times per minute): Synchronised (Clock Master)
D-LINK Green Data link status indication
• OFF: Not established
• ON: Established

Maximum Cabling Distance of Extension Connection

The maximum length of the extension cable that connects the PRI23 cards is shown below:

Diameter Maximum Distance

0.5 mm: 200 m

114 Installation Manual

 3.5.11 IP-GW4E Card (KX-TDA0484)

3.5.11 IP-GW4E Card (KX-TDA0484)

Function
4-channel VoIP gateway card. Compliant with VoIP H.323 V.2 protocol, and ITU-T G.729A, G.723.1 and G.
711 CODEC methods.

LEDs

RJ45
(10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)

To private IP network

Accessories and User-supplied Items

Accessories (included): CD-ROM (including documentation for web programming) ´ 1
User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector

Note
• The maximum length of the cable to be connected to this optional service card is 100 m.
• The IP-GW4E card occupies the space of only 1 free slot when it is installed in the PBX.
• For programming instructions and other information about the IP-GW4E card, refer to the
documentation for the IP-GW4E card. To programme the IP-GW4E card, use the web programming
designed for the IP-GW4E card.
• To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "3.16.1 Starting the
PBX".

Pin Assignments
RJ45 Connector (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
No. Signal Name Input (I)/Output (O) Function

1 TPO+ O Transmit data+

8
2 TPO- O Transmit data-
1 3 TPI+ I Receive data+
4-5 Reserved – –
6 TPI- I Receive data-
7-8 Reserved – –

Installation Manual 115

3.5.11 IP-GW4E Card (KX-TDA0484)

LED Indications
Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS Green/Red Card status indication

• OFF: Power Off
• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)
• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)
• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)
• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service
ONLINE Green On-line status indication
• ON: On-line mode
• OFF: Off-line mode
• Flashing: Maintenance mode
Note
If the LINK indicator is OFF, the ONLINE indicator will also be OFF.
ALARM Red Alarm indication
• OFF: Normal
• ON: Alarm
VoIP BUSY Green VoIP (H.323) process indication
• OFF: VoIP process inactive
• ON: VoIP process active
LINK Green Link status indication
• OFF: Connection error
• ON: Normal connection
DATA Green Data transmission indication
• OFF: No data transmitted
• ON: Data transmitting

116 Installation Manual

 3.5.12 IP-GW16 Card (KX-TDA0490)

3.5.12 IP-GW16 Card (KX-TDA0490)

Function
16-channel VoIP gateway card. Compliant with VoIP H.323 V.2 protocol, and ITU-T G.729A, G.723.1 and G.
711 CODEC methods.

LEDs

RJ45
(10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Full Duplex)

To private IP network

Accessories and User-supplied Items

Accessories (included): Ferrite core ´ 1, CD-ROM (including documentation for web programming) ´ 1
User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector

Note
• The maximum length of the cable to be connected to this optional service card is 100 m.
• When connecting the RJ45 connector, attach the included ferrite core. Refer to "3.2.9 Attaching a
Ferrite Core".
• For programming instructions and other information about the IP-GW16 card, refer to the
documentation for the IP-GW16 card. To programme the IP-GW16 card, use the web programming
designed for the IP-GW16 card.
• To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "3.16.1 Starting the
PBX".

Pin Assignments
RJ45 Connector (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
No. Signal Name Input (I)/Output (O) Function

1 TPO+ O Transmit data+

8
2 TPO- O Transmit data-
1 3 TPI+ I Receive data+
4-5 Reserved – –
6 TPI- I Receive data-
7-8 Reserved – –

Installation Manual 117

3.5.12 IP-GW16 Card (KX-TDA0490)

LED Indications
Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS Green/Red Card status indication

• OFF: Power Off
• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)
• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)
• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)
• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service
ONLINE Green On-line status indication
• ON: On-line mode
• OFF: Off-line mode
• Flashing: Maintenance mode
Note
If the LINK indicator is OFF, the ONLINE indicator will also be OFF.
ALARM Red Alarm indication
• OFF: Normal
• ON: Alarm
VoIP BUSY Green VoIP (H.323) process indication
• OFF: VoIP process inactive
• ON: VoIP process active
LINK Green Link status indication
• OFF: Connection error
• ON: Normal connection
DATA Green Data transmission indication
• OFF: No data transmitted
• ON: Data transmitting

118 Installation Manual

 3.6.1 CSIF4 Card (KX-TDA0143) and CSIF8 Card (KX-TDA0144)

3.6 Information about the Physical Extension Cards

3.6.1 CSIF4 Card (KX-TDA0143) and CSIF8 Card (KX-TDA0144)

Function
CSIF4: 4-port CS interface card for 4 CSs.
CSIF8: 8-port CS interface card for 8 CSs.

LED

RJ45
(LINE 1 to LINE 8)

To CS

Accessories and User-supplied Items

Accessories (included): none
User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector

CAUTION
Make sure that the status of all the CSs connected to the CSIF cards are set to in-service (INS). For
information about how to view CS information using the Maintenance Console, refer to "2.6.15 Utility—
CS Information" in the PC Programming Manual. If there is a CS in out-of-service (OUS) status, make sure
that it is securely connected to the CSIF card. If the CS remains in OUS status, there may be a fault with
the connection. Do not leave the connected CS in OUS status since it may cause severe damage to the
CSIF card.

Note
• LINE 5 to LINE 8 are for CSIF8 card only.
• When using the CSIF4 card, please note that the PBX software will recognise the CSIF4 card as the
CSIF8 card. As a result, 8 cell stations may appear to be available; however, only 4 cell stations are
supported by the CSIF4 card.
• For details about connecting the CS, refer to "3.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the
PBX" in "3.9 Connection of DECT Portable Stations" or "3.10.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the
PBX" in "3.10 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations".

Installation Manual 119

3.6.1 CSIF4 Card (KX-TDA0143) and CSIF8 Card (KX-TDA0144)

Pin Assignments
RJ45 Connector
No. Signal Name Function

1-2 Reserved –
8
3 D1 Data port (High)
1 4 POWH Power (High)
5 POWL Power (Low)
6 D2 Data port (Low)
7-8 Reserved –

LED Indications
Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS Green/Red Card status indication

• OFF: Power Off
• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)
• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)
• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)
• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service

120 Installation Manual

 3.6.2 DHLC8 Card (KX-TDA0170)

3.6.2 DHLC8 Card (KX-TDA0170)

Function
8-port digital hybrid extension card for DPTs, APTs, SLTs, DSS consoles, and PT-interface CSs, with 2 power
failure transfer (PFT) ports.

LED

Amphenol

To extensions

Accessories and User-supplied Items

Accessories (included): Screws ´ 2, Ferrite core ´ 1
User-supplied (not included): Amphenol connector

Note
• Attach the included ferrite core to the cable. Refer to "3.2.9 Attaching a Ferrite Core".
• To connect the Amphenol connector, refer to "3.2.10 Fastening an Amphenol Connector".
• For details about power failure transfer, refer to "3.15.1 Power Failure Connections".

Pin Assignments
Amphenol Connector
No. Signal Name Function No. Signal Name Function
50 25 1 RA SLT Ring port 1 26 TA SLT Tip port 1
2 D2A PT Data port 1 27 D1A PT Data port 1
(Low) (High)
3 Reserved – 28 Reserved –
4 RB SLT Ring port 2 29 TB SLT Tip port 2

26 1
5 D2B PT Data port 2 30 D1B PT Data port 2
(Low) (High)
6 Reserved – 31 Reserved –
7 RC SLT Ring port 3 32 TC SLT Tip port 3

Installation Manual 121

3.6.2 DHLC8 Card (KX-TDA0170)

No. Signal Name Function No. Signal Name Function

8 D2C PT Data port 3 33 D1C PT Data port 3

(Low) (High)
9 Reserved – 34 Reserved –
10 RD SLT Ring port 4 35 TD SLT Tip port 4
11 D2D PT Data port 4 36 D1D PT Data port 4
(Low) (High)
12 Reserved – 37 Reserved –
13 RE SLT Ring port 5 38 TE SLT Tip port 5
14 D2E PT Data port 5 39 D1E PT Data port 5
(Low) (High)
15 Reserved – 40 Reserved –
16 RF SLT Ring port 6 41 TF SLT Tip port 6
17 D2F PT Data port 6 42 D1F PT Data port 6
(Low) (High)
18 Reserved – 43 Reserved –
19 RG SLT Ring port 7 44 TG SLT Tip port 7
20 D2G PT Data port 7 45 D1G PT Data port 7
(Low) (High)
21 Reserved – 46 Reserved –
22 RH SLT Ring port 8 47 TH SLT Tip port 8
23 D2H PT Data port 8 48 D1H PT Data port 8
(Low) (High)
24-25 Reserved – 49-50 Reserved –

LED Indications
Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS Green/ Card status indication

Orange/Red • OFF: Power Off
• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)
• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)
• Orange Flashing: Detection of PT-interface CS connection (when
starting up the PT-interface CS)
• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)
• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service

122 Installation Manual

 3.6.3 DLC8 Card (KX-TDA0171)

3.6.3 DLC8 Card (KX-TDA0171)

Function
8-port digital extension card for DPTs, DSS consoles, and PT-interface CSs.

LED

Amphenol

To extensions

Accessories and User-supplied Items

Accessories (included): Screws ´ 2, Ferrite core ´ 1
User-supplied (not included): Amphenol connector

Note
• Attach the included ferrite core to the cable. Refer to "3.2.9 Attaching a Ferrite Core".
• To connect the Amphenol connector, refer to "3.2.10 Fastening an Amphenol Connector".

Pin Assignments
Amphenol Connector
No. Signal Name Function No. Signal Name Function
50 25 1 Reserved – 26 Reserved –
2 D2A Data port 1 (Low) 27 D1A Data port 1 (High)
3-4 Reserved – 28-29 Reserved –
5 D2B Data port 2 (Low) 30 D1B Data port 2 (High)
6-7 Reserved – 31-32 Reserved –
26 1 8 D2C Data port 3 (Low) 33 D1C Data port 3 (High)
9-10 Reserved – 34-35 Reserved –
11 D2D Data port 4 (Low) 36 D1D Data port 4 (High)
12-13 Reserved – 37-38 Reserved –
14 D2E Data port 5 (Low) 39 D1E Data port 5 (High)

Installation Manual 123

3.6.3 DLC8 Card (KX-TDA0171)

No. Signal Name Function No. Signal Name Function

15-16 Reserved – 40-41 Reserved –

17 D2F Data port 6 (Low) 42 D1F Data port 6 (High)
18-19 Reserved – 43-44 Reserved –
20 D2G Data port 7 (Low) 45 D1G Data port 7 (High)
21-22 Reserved – 46-47 Reserved –
23 D2H Data port 8 (Low) 48 D1H Data port 8 (High)
24-25 Reserved – 49-50 Reserved –

LED Indications
Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS Green/ Card status indication

Orange/Red • OFF: Power Off
• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)
• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)
• Orange Flashing: Detection of PT-interface CS connection (when
starting up the PT-interface CS)
• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)
• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service

124 Installation Manual

 3.6.4 DLC16 Card (KX-TDA0172)

3.6.4 DLC16 Card (KX-TDA0172)

Function
16-port digital extension card for DPTs, DSS consoles, and PT-interface CSs.

LED

Amphenol

To extensions

Accessories and User-supplied Items

Accessories (included): Screws ´ 2, Ferrite core ´ 1
User-supplied (not included): Amphenol connector

Note
• Attach the included ferrite core to the cable. Refer to "3.2.9 Attaching a Ferrite Core".
• To connect the Amphenol connector, refer to "3.2.10 Fastening an Amphenol Connector".

Pin Assignments
Amphenol Connector
No. Signal Name Function No. Signal Name Function
50 25 1 D2A Data port 1 (Low) 26 D1A Data port 1 (High)
2 D2B Data port 2 (Low) 27 D1B Data port 2 (High)
3 D2C Data port 3 (Low) 28 D1C Data port 3 (High)
4 D2D Data port 4 (Low) 29 D1D Data port 4 (High)
5 D2E Data port 5 (Low) 30 D1E Data port 5 (High)
26 1 6 D2F Data port 6 (Low) 31 D1F Data port 6 (High)
7 D2G Data port 7 (Low) 32 D1G Data port 7 (High)
8 D2H Data port 8 (Low) 33 D1H Data port 8 (High)
9 D2I Data port 9 (Low) 34 D1I Data port 9 (High)
10 D2J Data port 10 (Low) 35 D1J Data port 10 (High)

Installation Manual 125

3.6.4 DLC16 Card (KX-TDA0172)

No. Signal Name Function No. Signal Name Function

11 D2K Data port 11 (Low) 36 D1K Data port 11 (High)

12 D2L Data port 12 (Low) 37 D1L Data port 12 (High)
13 D2M Data port 13 (Low) 38 D1M Data port 13 (High)
14 D2N Data port 14 (Low) 39 D1N Data port 14 (High)
15 D2O Data port 15 (Low) 40 D1O Data port 15 (High)
16 D2P Data port 16 (Low) 41 D1P Data port 16 (High)
17-25 Reserved – 42-50 Reserved –

LED Indications
Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS Green/ Card status indication

Orange/Red • OFF: Power Off
• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)
• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)
• Orange Flashing: Detection of PT-interface CS connection (when
starting up the PT-interface CS)
• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)
• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service

126 Installation Manual

 3.6.5 SLC8 Card (KX-TDA0173)

3.6.5 SLC8 Card (KX-TDA0173)

Function
8-port extension card for SLTs with 2 power failure transfer (PFT) ports.

LED

Amphenol

To extensions

Accessories and User-supplied Items

Accessories (included): Screws ´ 2, Ferrite core ´ 1
User-supplied (not included): Amphenol connector

Note
• Attach the included ferrite core to the cable. Refer to "3.2.9 Attaching a Ferrite Core".
• To connect the Amphenol connector, refer to "3.2.10 Fastening an Amphenol Connector".
• For details about power failure transfer, refer to "3.15.1 Power Failure Connections".

Installation Manual 127

3.6.5 SLC8 Card (KX-TDA0173)

Pin Assignments
Amphenol Connector
No. Signal Name Function No. Signal Name Function
50 25 1 RA Ring port 1 26 TA Tip port 1
2-3 Reserved – 27-28 Reserved –
4 RB Ring port 2 29 TB Tip port 2
5-6 Reserved – 30-31 Reserved –
7 RC Ring port 3 32 TC Tip port 3
26 1 8-9 Reserved – 33-34 Reserved –
10 RD Ring port 4 35 TD Tip port 4
11-12 Reserved – 36-37 Reserved –
13 RE Ring port 5 38 TE Tip port 5
14-15 Reserved – 39-40 Reserved –
16 RF Ring port 6 41 TF Tip port 6
17-18 Reserved – 42-43 Reserved –
19 RG Ring port 7 44 TG Tip port 7
20-21 Reserved – 45-46 Reserved –
22 RH Ring port 8 47 TH Tip port 8
23-25 Reserved – 48-50 Reserved –

LED Indications
Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS Green/Red Card status indication

• OFF: Power Off
• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)
• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)
• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)
• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service

128 Installation Manual

 3.6.6 EXT-CID Card (KX-TDA0168)

3.6.6 EXT-CID Card (KX-TDA0168)

Function
Sends Caller ID signals to extension ports. To be mounted on the SLC8 card only.

SLC8 Card inside

Screw

EXT-CID Card

Accessories and User-supplied Items

Accessories (included): Screws ´ 2
User-supplied (not included): none

Installation Manual 129

3.6.7 SLC16 Card (KX-TDA0174), MSLC16 Card (KX-TDA0175), and CSLC16 Card (KX-TDA0177)

3.6.7 SLC16 Card (KX-TDA0174), MSLC16 Card (KX-TDA0175), and

CSLC16 Card (KX-TDA0177)
Function
SLC16: 16-port extension card for SLTs with 4 power failure transfer (PFT) ports.
MSLC16: 16-port extension card for SLTs with Message Waiting Lamp control and 4 power failure
transfer (PFT) ports. Maximum power output of 160 V/90 V for Message Waiting Lamp
control.
CSLC16: 16-port extension card for SLTs with Caller ID (FSK) and 4 power failure transfer (PFT) ports

LED

Amphenol

To extensions

Accessories and User-supplied Items

Accessories (included): Screws ´ 2, Ferrite core ´ 1
User-supplied (not included): Amphenol connector

Note
• Panasonic SLT with Message Waiting Lamp (e.g., KX-T7710) is recommended for connection to the
MSLC16 card.
• Attach the included ferrite core to the cable. Refer to "3.2.9 Attaching a Ferrite Core".
• To connect the Amphenol connector, refer to "3.2.10 Fastening an Amphenol Connector".
• For details about power failure transfer, refer to "3.15.1 Power Failure Connections".

130 Installation Manual

 3.6.7 SLC16 Card (KX-TDA0174), MSLC16 Card (KX-TDA0175), and CSLC16 Card (KX-TDA0177)

Pin Assignments
Amphenol Connector
No. Signal Name Function No. Signal Name Function
50 25 1 RA Ring port 1 26 TA Tip port 1
2 RB Ring port 2 27 TB Tip port 2
3 RC Ring port 3 28 TC Tip port 3
4 RD Ring port 4 29 TD Tip port 4
5 RE Ring port 5 30 TE Tip port 5
26 1 6 RF Ring port 6 31 TF Tip port 6
7 RG Ring port 7 32 TG Tip port 7
8 RH Ring port 8 33 TH Tip port 8
9 RI Ring port 9 34 TI Tip port 9
10 RJ Ring port 10 35 TJ Tip port 10
11 RK Ring port 11 36 TK Tip port 11
12 RL Ring port 12 37 TL Tip port 12
13 RM Ring port 13 38 TM Tip port 13
14 RN Ring port 14 39 TN Tip port 14
15 RO Ring port 15 40 TO Tip port 15
16 RP Ring port 16 41 TP Tip port 16
17-25 Reserved – 42-50 Reserved –

LED Indications
Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS Green/Red Card status indication

• OFF: Power Off
• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)
• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)
• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)
• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service

Installation Manual 131

3.6.8 IP-EXT16 Card (KX-TDA0470)

3.6.8 IP-EXT16 Card (KX-TDA0470)

Function
16-channel VoIP extension card. Compliant with Panasonic proprietary protocol, and ITU-T G.729A and G.
711 CODEC methods.

LEDs

RJ45
(10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Full Duplex)

To LAN

Accessories and User-supplied Items

Accessories (included): Ferrite core ´ 1
User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector

Note
• The maximum length of the cable to be connected to this optional service card is 100 m.
• When connecting the RJ45 connector, attach the included ferrite core. Refer to "3.2.9 Attaching a
Ferrite Core".

Pin Assignments
RJ45 Connector (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
No. Signal Name Input (I)/Output (O) Function

1 TPO+ O Transmit data+

8
2 TPO- O Transmit data-
1 3 TPI+ I Receive data+
4-5 Reserved – –
6 TPI- I Receive data-
7-8 Reserved – –

132 Installation Manual

 3.6.8 IP-EXT16 Card (KX-TDA0470)

LED Indications
Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS Green/Red Card status indication

• OFF: Power Off
• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)
• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)
• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)
• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service
ONLINE Green On-line status indication
• ON: At least one port is in use (an IP-PT is connected)
• OFF: No ports are in use (no IP-PTs are connected)
Note
If the LINK indicator is OFF, the ONLINE indicator will also be OFF.
ALARM Red Alarm indication
• OFF: Normal
• ON: Alarm
VoIP BUSY Green Panasonic proprietary VoIP protocol process indication
• OFF: VoIP process inactive
• ON: VoIP process active
LINK Green Link status indication
• OFF: Connection error
• ON: Normal connection
DATA Green Data transmission indication
• OFF: No data transmitted
• ON: Data transmitting

Installation Manual 133

3.7.1 OPB3 Card (KX-TDA0190)

3.7 Information about the Other Physical Cards

3.7.1 OPB3 Card (KX-TDA0190)

Function
Optional 3-slot base card for mounting a maximum of 3 option cards from the following:
• DPH4 card
• DPH2 card
• EIO4 card
• ECHO16 card
• MSG4 card
• ESVM2 card
• ESVM4 card

LED

Accessories and User-supplied Items

Accessories (included): none
User-supplied (not included): none

WARNING
A lithium battery is used in OPB3 card. There is a risk of explosion if the battery is replaced with
the incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

LED Indications
Indication Colour Description

CARD STATUS Green/Red Card status indication

• OFF: Power Off
• Green ON: Normal (all ports are idle)
• Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Normal (a port is in use)
• Red ON: Fault (includes reset)
• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service

134 Installation Manual

 3.7.2 DPH4 Card (KX-TDA0161)

3.7.2 DPH4 Card (KX-TDA0161)

Function
4-port doorphone card for 4 doorphones and 4 door openers. To be mounted on the OPB3 card.

Fully insert the connectors through

the panel openings.

OPB3 Card DPH4 Card

8-pin
Screw

To doorphones

To door openers

10-pin

Accessories and User-supplied Items

Accessories (included): Screws ´ 3, 10-pin terminal block ´ 1, 8-pin terminal block ´ 1
User-supplied (not included): Copper wire

Note
For details about connection to doorphones and door openers, refer to "3.12.1 Connection of Doorphones,
Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays".

Installation Manual 135

3.7.2 DPH4 Card (KX-TDA0161)

Pin Assignments
8-pin Terminal Block
No. Signal Name Function

1 1 DP4 Doorphone 4 transmit

2 com4 Doorphone 4 receive
3 DP3 Doorphone 3 transmit
4 com3 Doorphone 3 receive
8
5 DP2 Doorphone 2 transmit
6 com2 Doorphone 2 receive
7 DP1 Doorphone 1 transmit
8 com1 Doorphone 1 receive

10-pin Terminal Block

No. Signal Name Function

1 1-2 Reserved –
3 OP4b Door opener 4
4 OP4a Door opener 4 com
5 OP3b Door opener 3
10 6 OP3a Door opener 3 com
7 OP2b Door opener 2
8 OP2a Door opener 2 com
9 OP1b Door opener 1
10 OP1a Door opener 1 com

136 Installation Manual

 3.7.3 DPH2 Card (KX-TDA0162)

3.7.3 DPH2 Card (KX-TDA0162)

Function
2-port doorphone card for 2 German-type doorphones and 2 door openers. To be mounted on the OPB3 card.

Fully insert the connectors through

the panel openings.

OPB3 Card DPH2 Card

8-pin
Screw

To doorphones/
door openers

10-pin

Accessories and User-supplied Items

Accessories (included): Screws ´ 3, 10-pin terminal block ´ 1, 8-pin terminal block ´ 1
User-supplied (not included): Copper wire

Note
For details about connection to doorphones and door openers, refer to "3.12.1 Connection of Doorphones,
Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays".

Installation Manual 137

3.7.3 DPH2 Card (KX-TDA0162)

Pin Assignments
8-pin Terminal Block
Proprietary Standard
No. Function
Signal Name Signal Name
1 1 Path_2b b (2) Doorphone 2 transmit
2 Path_2a a (2) Doorphone 2 receive
3 Call_2b RT b (2) Doorphone 2 call button
4 Call_2a RT a (2) Doorphone 2 call button com
8
5 Path_1b b (1) Doorphone 1 transmit
6 Path_1a a (1) Doorphone 1 receive
7 Call_1b RT b (1) Doorphone 1 call button
8 Call_1a RT a (1) Doorphone 1 call button com

10-pin Terminal Block

Proprietary Standard
No. Function
Signal Name Signal Name
1 1-2 Reserved Reserved –
3 OP2b TO b (2) Door opener 2
4 OP2a TO a (2) Door opener 2 com
5 OP1b TO b (1) Door opener 1
10 6 OP1a TO a (1) Door opener 1 com
7 DC2b TS b (2) Doorphone control 2
8 DC2a TS a (2) Doorphone control 2 com
9 DC1b TS b (1) Doorphone control 1
10 DC1a TS a (1) Doorphone control 1 com

138 Installation Manual

 3.7.3 DPH2 Card (KX-TDA0162)

Connection Diagram for German-type Doorphones and Door Openers

German-type Doorphone 2
8
7 BL: Light
6
5
4
RT RT: Call Button
3 Door OP: Door Opener Connection Terminal
2 BL
1
Opener 2 DC: Doorphone Current Supply Control Terminal
Call_2b L O U B Call_2a Path: Doorphone Call Path
: Speaker
: Microphone
~0 V L O U B~12 V~8 V TO : Shield
Path_2a
Path_2b
DC2b Doorphone 2
DC2a Adaptor
OP2b
OP2a

220 V~
German-type Doorphone 1

RT

BL Door
Opener 1
Call_1a L O U B Call_1b

10 ~0 V L O U B~12 V~8 V TO
9 Path_1a
8 Path_1b
7
6 DC1b Doorphone 1
5 DC1a Adaptor
4 OP1b
3 OP1a
2
1

220 V~

Installation Manual 139

3.7.4 EIO4 Card (KX-TDA0164)

3.7.4 EIO4 Card (KX-TDA0164)

Function
4-port external input/output card. To be mounted on the OPB3 card.

Fully insert the connectors through

the panel openings.

OPB3 Card EIO4 Card

8-pin
Screw

To external sensors

To external relays

10-pin

Accessories and User-supplied Items

Accessories (included): Screws ´ 3, 10-pin terminal block ´ 1, 8-pin terminal block ´ 1
User-supplied (not included): Copper wire

Note
For details about connection to external sensors and external relays, refer to "3.12.1 Connection of
Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays".

140 Installation Manual

 3.7.4 EIO4 Card (KX-TDA0164)

Pin Assignments
8-pin Terminal Block
No. Signal Name Function

1 1 C4b Control 4
2 C4a Control 4 com
3 C3b Control 3
4 C3a Control 3 com
8
5 C2b Control 2
6 C2a Control 2 com
7 C1b Control 1
8 C1a Control 1 com

10-pin Terminal Block

No. Signal Name Function

1 1-2 Reserved –
3 OP4b Opener 4
4 OP4a Opener 4 com
5 OP3b Opener 3
10 6 OP3a Opener 3 com
7 OP2b Opener 2
8 OP2a Opener 2 com
9 OP1b Opener 1
10 OP1a Opener 1 com

Installation Manual 141

3.7.4 EIO4 Card (KX-TDA0164)

External Sensor
Power to the external sensor is provided from the EIO4 card and must be grounded through the EIO4 card as
indicated in the diagram below. A pair of "sensor" and "common" lines are connected to the EIO4 card for each
external sensor. The PBX detects input from the sensor when the signal is under 100 W.
Connection Diagram
PBX
OPB3
EIO4 +5V
External Sensor
+5V
33
10K sensor
I/O
4.7K 33
common
4.7K

External Relay
Current Limit: 24 V DC/30 V AC, 1 A maximum

142 Installation Manual

 3.7.5 ECHO16 Card (KX-TDA0166)

3.7.5 ECHO16 Card (KX-TDA0166)

Function
16-channel card for echo cancellation during conferences. To be mounted on the OPB3 card.

OPB3 Card

inside

ECHO16 Card

Screw

Accessories and User-supplied Items

Accessories (included): Screws ´ 3
User-supplied (not included): none

Note
To establish a conference call involving 6 to 8 parties, install an ECHO16 card and enable echo cancellation
for conferences using the Maintenance Console. For details, refer to "Echo Cancel—Conference"
in "4.18 [2-9] System Options" of the PC Programming Manual.

Installation Manual 143

3.7.6 MSG4 Card (KX-TDA0191)

3.7.6 MSG4 Card (KX-TDA0191)

Function
4-channel message card. To be mounted on the OPB3 card.

OPB3 Card

inside

MSG4 Card

Screw

Accessories and User-supplied Items

Accessories (included): Screws ´ 3
User-supplied (not included): none

144 Installation Manual

 3.7.7 ESVM2 Card (KX-TDA0192) and ESVM4 Card (KX-TDA0194)

3.7.7 ESVM2 Card (KX-TDA0192) and ESVM4 Card (KX-TDA0194)

Function
ESVM2: 2-channel simplified voice message card for Built-in Simplified Voice Message feature. Also
supports MSG card features. To be mounted on the OPB3 card.
ESVM4: 4-channel simplified voice message card for Built-in Simplified Voice Message feature. Also
supports MSG card features. To be mounted on the OPB3 card.

OPB3 Card

inside

ESVM Card

Screw

Accessories and User-supplied Items

Accessories (included): Screws ´ 3
User-supplied (not included): none

CAUTION
When installing/uninstalling an ESVM card, be careful not to damage the chips around the connection
parts. Doing so may cause severe damage to the ESVM card.

Note
When using an ESVM card for the SVM feature, it must be mounted on sub-slot 3 (highest slot) of the
OPB3 card.

Installation Manual 145

3.8.1 Maximum Cabling Distances of the Extension Wiring (Twisted Cable)

3.8 Connection of Extensions

3.8.1 Maximum Cabling Distances of the Extension Wiring

(Twisted Cable)
Cable Maximum Distance
ø 0.4 mm: 222 m PT-interface CS
ø 0.5 mm: 347 m
ø 0.6 mm: 500 m
CAT 5: 347 m

Cable Maximum Distance KX-DT300 Series DPT

ø 0.4 mm: 500 m
ø 0.5 mm: 720 m
ø 0.6 mm: 830 m
CAT 5: 720 m

Cable Maximum Distance KX-T7600 Series DPT

ø 0.4 mm: 500 m
ø 0.5 mm: 720 m
ø 0.6 mm: 830 m
CAT 5: 720 m

Other PT (DPT/APT)
Cable Maximum Distance and DSS Console
ø 0.4 mm: 140 m
ø 0.5 mm: 229 m
ø 0.6 mm: 360 m
CAT 5: 229 m

Cable Maximum Distance

ø 0.4 mm: 698 m
ø 0.5 mm: 1128 m
ø 0.6 mm: 1798 m SLT
CAT 5: 1128 m

Notice
The maximum cabling distance may vary depending on the conditions.

PT-interface CS DPT APT DSS Console SLT

DHLC8 Card ü ü ü ü ü
MSLC16, CSLC16,
ü
SLC16, SLC8 Cards
DLC16, DLC8 Cards ü ü ü

146 Installation Manual

 3.8.1 Maximum Cabling Distances of the Extension Wiring (Twisted Cable)

"ü" indicates that the extension card supports the terminal.

Installation Manual 147

3.8.2 Parallel Connection of the Extensions

3.8.2 Parallel Connection of the Extensions

Any SLT can be connected in parallel with an APT or a DPT as follows.

Note
In addition to an SLT, an answering machine, a fax machine or a modem (PC) can be connected in parallel
with an APT or a DPT.

With APT
For parallel connection, eXtra Device Port (XDP) mode must be disabled for that port through system
programming. Refer to "1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone" and "2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration" in the Feature
Guide for further information.
To DHLC8 card

Modular
T-Adaptor

2-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "T" and "R".
4-conductor wiring cord
Connect pins "T", "R", "D1",
and "D2".

APT SLT

148 Installation Manual

 3.8.2 Parallel Connection of the Extensions

With DPT
Parallel mode or eXtra Device Port (XDP) mode can be selected through system programming.
If XDP mode is enabled through system programming, parallel connection is not possible. Refer
to "1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone" and "2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration" in the Feature Guide for further
information.

Using a Modular T-Adaptor

To DHLC8 card

Modular
T-Adaptor

2-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "T" and "R".

4-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "D1" and
"D2".

DPT SLT

Using an EXtra Device Port

With KX-DT300 Series DPT (except KX-DT321)
To DHLC8 card

2-conductor wiring cord

4-conductor wiring cord
Connect pins "T" and "R".
Connect pins "T", "R",
"D1" and "D2".

DPT SLT

TO MAIN UNIT TO TEL

/ PABX

To DHLC8 card
To SLT

Installation Manual 149

3.8.2 Parallel Connection of the Extensions

With KX-T7600 Series DPT (except KX-T7665)

To DHLC8 card

2-conductor wiring cord

4-conductor wiring cord
Connect pins "T" and "R".
Connect pins "T", "R",
"D1" and "D2".

DPT SLT

TO MAIN UNIT TO TEL

/ PABX

To DHLC8 card
To SLT

With Other DPT (except KX-T7560 and KX-T7565)

To DHLC8 card
2-conductor wiring cord
4-conductor wiring cord Connect pins "T" and "R".
Connect pins "T", "R",
"D1" and "D2".

DPT SLT

TO TEL

TO EMSS or TO MAIN UNIT

To DHLC8 card To SLT

150 Installation Manual

 3.8.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection

3.8.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection

A DPT can be connected to another DPT on the Digital XDP connection. In addition, if the DPT is connected
to a DHLC8 card, it can also have an SLT connected in Parallel mode or XDP mode.

Note
• Both DPTs must be KX-DT300/KX-T7600 series DPTs (except KX-T7640). Note that the KX-T7667
can only be connected as a slave DPT.
• Bluetooth Modules or USB Modules must not be connected to DPTs in the Digital XDP connection.
• Parallel mode or XDP mode can be selected through system programming.
• If XDP mode is enabled through system programming, parallel connection is not possible. Refer
to "1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone" and "2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration" in the Feature Guide for
further information.

With KX-DT300 Series DPT

Using a Modular T-Adaptor

To DLC8/DLC16 card

To DHLC8 card Modular

(for connection of SLT) T-Adaptor
2-conductor wiring cord
Connect pins "T" and "R".

4-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "D1" and "D2".
4-conductor wiring cord
Connect pins "D1" and
"D2".

SLT

Master DPT Slave DPT

Back View of DPTs

TO MAIN UNIT
Cable Maximum Distance
TO TEL ø 0.4 mm: 30 m / PABX
ø 0.5 mm: 50 m
ø 0.6 mm: 60 m
CAT 5: 50 m

Master DPT Slave DPT

TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX
To DLC8/DLC16 card

To DHLC8 card
(for connection of SLT)

Installation Manual 151

3.8.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection

Using an EXtra Device Port

To DLC8/DLC16 card

To DHLC8 card 4-conductor wiring cord

(for connection of SLT) Connect pins "T", "R", 2-conductor wiring cord
"D1" and "D2". Connect pins "T" and "R".
4-conductor wiring cord
Connect pins "T", "R",
"D1" and "D2".

Master DPT Slave DPT SLT

Back View of DPTs

TO MAIN UNIT
Cable Maximum Distance
TO TEL ø 0.4 mm: 30 m / PABX
ø 0.5 mm: 50 m
ø 0.6 mm: 60 m
CAT 5: 50 m

Master DPT Slave DPT

TO MAIN UNIT TO TEL
/ PABX
To DLC8/DLC16 card To SLT

To DHLC8 card
(for connection of SLT)

152 Installation Manual

 3.8.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection

With KX-T7600 Series DPT (except KX-T7600E Series)

Using a Modular T-Adaptor

To DLC8/DLC16 card

To DHLC8 card Modular

(for connection of SLT) T-Adaptor
2-conductor wiring cord
Connect pins "T" and "R".

4-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "D1" and "D2".
4-conductor wiring cord
Connect pins "D1" and
"D2".

SLT

Master DPT Slave DPT

Back View of DPTs

TO TEL TO MAIN UNIT

/ PABX
Cable Maximum Distance
ø 0.4 mm: 30 m
ø 0.5 mm: 50 m
ø 0.6 mm: 60 m
CAT 5: 50 m

TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX
Master DPT Slave DPT
To DLC8/DLC16 card

To DHLC8 card
(for connection of SLT)

Installation Manual 153

3.8.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection

Using an EXtra Device Port

To DLC8/DLC16 card

To DHLC8 card 4-conductor wiring cord

(for connection of SLT) Connect pins "T", "R", 2-conductor wiring cord
"D1" and "D2". Connect pins "T" and "R".
4-conductor wiring cord
Connect pins "T", "R",
"D1" and "D2".

Master DPT Slave DPT SLT

Back View of DPTs

TO TEL TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX
Cable Maximum Distance
ø 0.4 mm: 30 m
ø 0.5 mm: 50 m
ø 0.6 mm: 60 m
CAT 5: 50 m

TO MAIN UNIT TO TEL

/ PABX Master DPT Slave DPT
To DLC8/DLC16 card To SLT

To DHLC8 card
(for connection of SLT)

154 Installation Manual

 3.8.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection

With KX-T7600E Series DPT

Using a Modular T-Adaptor

To DLC8/DLC16 card

To DHLC8 card Modular

(for connection of SLT) T-Adaptor
2-conductor wiring cord
Connect pins "T" and "R".

4-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "D1" and "D2".
4-conductor wiring cord
Connect pins "D1" and "D2".

SLT

Master DPT Slave DPT

Back View of DPTs

TO DIGITAL TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX
Cable Maximum Distance
ø 0.4 mm: 30 m
ø 0.5 mm: 50 m
ø 0.6 mm: 60 m
CAT 5: 50 m

TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX
Master DPT Slave DPT
To DLC8/DLC16 card

To DHLC8 card
(for connection of SLT)

Installation Manual 155

3.8.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection

Using an EXtra Device Port

Connecting to a Slave DPT

To DLC8/DLC16 card

To DHLC8 card
4-conductor wiring cord
(for connection of SLT)
Connect pins "T", "R", 2-conductor wiring cord
"D1" and "D2". Connect pins "T" and "R".
4-conductor wiring cord
Connect pins "T", "R",
"D1" and "D2".

Master DPT Slave DPT SLT

Back View of DPTs

TO DIGITAL TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX
Cable Maximum Distance
ø 0.4 mm: 30 m
ø 0.5 mm: 50 m
ø 0.6 mm: 60 m
CAT 5: 50 m

TO MAIN UNIT TO TEL

/ PABX Master DPT Slave DPT
To DLC8/DLC16 card To SLT

To DHLC8 card
(for connection of SLT)

156 Installation Manual

 3.8.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection

Connecting to a Master DPT

To DLC8/DLC16 card

To DHLC8 card
(for connection of SLT) 4-conductor wiring cord
Connect pins "D1" and "D2".
4-conductor wiring cord
Connect pins "T", "R",
"D1" and "D2".

Master DPT Slave DPT

2-conductor wiring cord
Connect pins "T" and "R".

SLT

Back View of DPTs

TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX
To DLC8/DLC16 card TO DIGITAL
To DHLC8 card TO TEL
(for connection of SLT)

To slave DPT
Cable Maximum Distance
ø 0.4 mm: 30 m
ø 0.5 mm: 50 m
ø 0.6 mm: 60 m To SLT
CAT 5: 50 m

Installation Manual 157

3.8.4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection

3.8.4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection

CTI connection between a PC and a KX-DT343/KX-DT346/KX-T7633/KX-T7636 DPT provides first party call
control. The CTI connection is made via a USB interface (version 2.0), and uses the TAPI 2.1 protocol.
A USB Module must be connected to the DPT.

Note
The operating system of the PC required for first party call control depends on your CTI application
software. For details, refer to the manual for your CTI application software.

KX-DT343/KX-DT346
USB Port USB Cable

USB Module

To PC

KX-T7633/KX-T7636

To PC
USB Port
USB Cable
L
UL

USB Module

Note
• The maximum length of the USB cable is 3 m.

158 Installation Manual

 3.9.1 Overview

3.9 Connection of DECT Portable Stations

3.9.1 Overview
Required Equipment and Maximum Number of Calls
CSs determine the area covered by the wireless system. The number of calls that can be made simultaneously
through each CS varies depending on the model, as follows:

CS Connection Card Maximum Calls Compatible PSs

KX-TDA0158CE DHLC/DLC 8 • KX-TCA155

KX-TDA0141CE DHLC/DLC 2
• KX-TCA255
• KX-TCA256
KX-TDA0142CE CSIF 4 • KX-TCA355
• KX-TD7590
• KX-TD7580

Notice
The CSs for DECT are for connection to specified Panasonic PBXs only.

Note
For more details about the PS, refer to the Operating Instructions of the PS.

Required Distances between Equipment

CAUTION
Maintain the distances listed below between equipment in order to prevent noise, interference or the
disconnection of a conversation. (The distance may vary depending on the environment.)

Equipment Distance

CS and office equipment such as a computer, telex, fax More than 2 m

machine, etc., or microwaves
CS and PS More than 1 m
Each PS More than 0.5 m
PBX and CS More than 2 m

Notice
Too many CSs in a small area can cause problems due to conflicts over which signal channels each CS
can use. Ideally, CSs should be a minimum of 25 m to 40 m apart.
However, the required distance between CSs may vary depending on the environment of the installation
site and conditions in which the wireless system is used. Conduct the site survey to determine the
appropriate distance.

RF Specification
Item Description

Radio Access Method MultiCarrier TDMA-TDD

Installation Manual 159

3.9.1 Overview

Item Description

Frequency Band 1880 MHz to 1900 MHz*1

Number of Carriers 10*2
Carrier Spacing 1728 kHz
Bit Rate 1152 kbps
Carrier Multiplex TDMA, 24 (Tx12, Rx12) slots per frame
Frame Length 10 ms
Modulation Scheme GFSK
Roll-off factor=0.5 50 % roll-off in the transmitter
Data Coding for Modulator Differential Coding
Voice CODEC 32 kbps ADPCM (CCITT G.721)
Transmission Output Average 10 mW
Peak 250 mW
*1
KX-TDE100BX/KX-TDE200BX: 1880 MHz to 1895 MHz
*2
KX-TDE100BX/KX-TDE200BX: 8

CAUTION
• The CS should be kept free of dust, moisture, high temperature (more than 40 °C), low temperature
(less than 0 °C), and vibration, and should not be exposed to direct sunlight.
• The CS should not be placed outdoors (use indoors).
• The CS should not be placed near high-voltage equipment.
• The CS should not be placed on a metal object.
• Do not use this wireless system near another high-power cordless system such as DECT or SS
wireless.

160 Installation Manual

 3.9.2 Procedure Overview

3.9.2 Procedure Overview

When connecting the wireless system, use extreme care in conducting the site survey. Site surveys can be
conducted using the KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355/KX-TD7590 PS. An incorrectly performed site
survey can result in poor service area, frequent noise, and disconnection of calls.

1. Investigate the installation site

Refer to "3.9.3 Site Planning".
a. Obtain a map of the CS installation site.
b. Identify the service area required by the user on the map.
c. Plan the location of each CS, taking account of distance, building materials, etc.

2. Prepare for site survey

Refer to "3.9.4 Before Site Survey".
a. Check and assign the CS ID number to the PS.
b. Assign a channel number to each CS by setting the DIP switches on the back of the CS.
c. Supply electricity to each CS using an AC adaptor/battery box or by connecting them to a CSIF/DLC/
DHLC card.
d. Install each CS temporarily as planned.
Note
• Install at least 2 m above the floor.
• Place the antennas so that they are pointing in directions that are 90 degrees apart (for antenna
diversity).

3. Conduct the site survey

Refer to "3.9.5 Site Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355/KX-TD7590".
a. Test the radio signal strength using the PS.
Confirm that the radio signal strength level is "12" near the CS.
Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355

To survey Display example:

specific channel
RADIO STRENGTH RADIO STRENGTH
1 9 0 Channel No. <<< MEASURING >>> CH0 SLOT:06 SYNC
L:12 0000/0100
CS-ID:9005301234
Press 1, 9, and POWER 0 to 9
for more than 2 seconds.

Using the KX-TD7590

To survey
specific channel Display example:
RADIO STRENGTH CH0 SLOT:06 SYNC
1 9 0 Channel No. <<< MEASURING >>> L:12 0000/0100
CS-ID:9005301234
Press 1, 9, and POWER 0 to 9
for more than 5 seconds.

b. By walking away from the CS with the PS, check the radio signal strength. The radio signal strength
weakens as you walk away from the CS.
c. Map the CS coverage area at radio signal strength levels "3" and "8".

Installation Manual 161

3.9.2 Procedure Overview

d. Make sure that adjacent CS coverage areas overlap where the radio signal strength level is "8" by at least
5 m.
e. Make sure that the radio signal strength level is greater than "3" at any location within the service area
required by the user.

4. Finish the site survey

Refer to "3.9.6 After Site Survey".
a. Turn off the PS.
b. Stop supplying power, and return all DIP switches of each CS to the OFF position.

5. Connect the CS and PS to the PBX and test the operation

Refer to "3.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX".
a. Connect the CSs to the PBX.
b. Register the PSs to the PBX.
c. Walk around the service area while having a conversation using a registered PS. If noise is frequent or
conversations disconnect, relocate the CSs or install an additional CS.

6. Mount the CS on the wall

Refer to "3.9.8 Wall Mounting".
a. If there are no problems in testing, mount the CS on the wall.

162 Installation Manual

 3.9.3 Site Planning

3.9.3 Site Planning

Choosing the best site for the CS requires careful planning and testing of essential areas. The best location
may not always be convenient for installation. Read the following information before installing the unit.

Understanding Radio Waves

Characteristics of Radio Waves
The transmission of radio waves and the CS coverage area depend on the structure and materials of the
building.
Office equipment, such as computers and fax machines, can interfere with radio waves. Such equipment may
create noise or interfere with the performance of the PS.
The illustration below shows the special transmitting patterns of radio waves.
1. Radio waves are reflected by objects made of materials such as metal.
2. Radio waves are diffracted by objects such as metallic columns.
3. Radio waves penetrate objects made of materials such as glass.

1. Reflection
CS

Column

2. Diffraction

3. Penetration

Relationships Between Radio Waves and Building Structure and Materials

• The CS coverage area is affected more by the building materials and their thickness than the number of
obstacles.
• Radio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted by conductive objects and rarely penetrate them.
• Radio waves tend to penetrate insulated objects and are rarely reflected by them.
• Radio waves penetrate thin objects more than thick objects.
• The table below shows the transmission tendency of radio waves when they reach objects made from
various materials.

Installation Manual 163

3.9.3 Site Planning

Object Material Transmission Tendency

Wall Concrete The thicker they are, the less radio waves penetrate
them.
Ferroconcrete Radio waves can penetrate them, but the more iron
there is, the more radio waves are reflected.
Window Glass Radio waves usually penetrate them.
Glass with wire net Radio waves can penetrate them, but tend to be
reflected.
Glass covered with Radio waves are weakened considerably when they
heat-resistant film penetrate windows.
Floor Ferroconcrete Radio waves can penetrate them, but the more iron
there is, the more radio waves are reflected.
Partition Steel Radio waves are reflected and rarely penetrate them.
Plywood, Glass Radio waves usually penetrate them.
Column Ferroconcrete Radio waves can penetrate them, but the more iron
there is, the more radio waves tend to be reflected or
diffracted.
Metal Radio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted.
Cabinet Steel Radio waves are usually reflected or diffracted, and
rarely penetrate them.
Wood Radio waves can penetrate them, but they are
weakened.

164 Installation Manual

 3.9.3 Site Planning

CS Coverage Area
The example below shows the size of the coverage area of 1 CS if it is installed in an area with no obstacles.

Note
Radio signal strength levels are measured during the site survey (refer to "3.9.5 Site Survey Using the
KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355/KX-TD7590").

A Coverage Area
Radio signal strength level is
greater than "3".
(About 50 m to 60 m)
A

B
B Good Coverage Area
Radio signal strength
level is greater than "8".
(About 30 m to 40 m)
Good sound quality
can be maintained.
Gray Zone:
Conversation will be
intermittent C Out of Service:
Cannot make/receive calls

Radio Signal Strength Levels

Level: 00 Out of range
Level: 01 to 02 Receives noise easily or disconnects
Level: 03 to 07 May receive noise
Level: 08 to 10 Good
Level: 11 to 12 Better

Site Survey Preparation

1. Obtain a map and investigate the installation site.
a. Check the obstacles (e.g., shelves, columns, and partitions).
b. Check the materials of the structures (e.g., metal, concrete, and plywood).
c. Check the layout and dimensions of the room, corridor, etc.
d. Write down the above information on the map.
2. Examine the service area required by the user on the map, referring to the following example.
a. Draw the coverage area around a CS. Extend the coverage area 30 m to 60 m in each direction,
depending on the materials of the building structures and obstacles in the installation site. Note that a
CS cannot be installed outside a building.
b. If 1 CS cannot cover the entire service area, install additional CSs as required. Overlap the coverage
areas of adjacent CSs.

Installation Manual 165

3.9.3 Site Planning

Where CS coverage areas overlap, the PS will start call handover to the next CS if the signal from one
CS becomes weak. However, if a PS moves away from a CS and there are no CSs available for
handover, the PS may go out of range and the call could be lost.

Example: Installing in a Room Separated by Interior Walls

Things to take note of:
• The room is separated by interior walls.
• The room is surrounded by concrete walls.
CS installation plan:
• The coverage area of each CS will not extend as far as when there are no obstacles, because the radio
signals will be weakened by separating walls. Therefore, you will need 5 CSs to cover the entire room.
150 m

70 m

CS no. 1

CS no. 2

CS no. 5

CS no. 3 CS no. 4

166 Installation Manual

 3.9.4 Before Site Survey

3.9.4 Before Site Survey

Use the KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355/KX-TD7590 PS to conduct the site survey.

Note
Display prompts for the site survey are only available in English.

Checking the CS ID Number

Check the CS ID number label attached to the CS. If the CS ID number label is not attached to the CS, check
the CS ID number using the Maintenance Console. For details, refer to "2.6.15 Utility—CS Information" in the
PC Programming Manual.

Assigning the CS ID Number to the PS

Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355
To enter letters
A: + 0 C: + ABC 2 E: + GHI 4

B: + 1 D: + DEF 3 F: + JKL 5

1 9 ABC 2 CS No. CS ID No.

Press 1, 9, and POWER 0 to 7 0 to 9 and A to F
for more than 2 seconds.

To the initial display To the Desired CS No.

Note
To clear the CS ID number assigned to the PS, follow the procedure below:

To clear one by one

CS No.
0 to 7
1 9 DEF 3
To the Desired CS No.
Press 1, 9, and POWER
for more than 2 seconds. OR

To clear all at once

To the initial display
#

Installation Manual 167

3.9.4 Before Site Survey

Using the KX-TD7590

To enter letters
A: F1 C: F3 E: OK

B: F2 D: INT' F:

1 9 ABC 2 CS No. CS ID No.

Press 1, 9, and POWER 0 to 7 0 to 9 and A to F
for more than 5 seconds.

To the initial display To the Desired CS No.

Note
To clear the CS ID number assigned to the PS, follow the procedure below:

To clear one by one

CS No.
0 to 7
1 9 DEF 3
To the Desired CS No.
Press 1, 9, and POWER
for more than 2 seconds. OR

To clear all at once

To the initial display
#

168 Installation Manual

 3.9.4 Before Site Survey

Setting and Installing the CS Temporarily for Site Survey

1. Switch the Radio Signal Test switch from OFF to ON.
2. Set the channel number switches as desired.
3. Set the Power Supply Select switch as desired (KX-TDA0158CE only).
KX-TDA0158CE
ON OFF

Radio Signal Test Switch 6

Power Supply Select Switch 5

ON: From the Battery Box
OFF: From the PBX 4

3
Channel Number Switch
2

DIP Switch

Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 9
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Installation Manual 169

3.9.4 Before Site Survey

KX-TDA0141CE/KX-TDA0142CE
DIP Switch
OFF ON

2
Channel Number Switch
3

4
Keep this switch at the default
5 "OFF" position. Otherwise, the
CS will not function.
6 Radio Signal
Test Switch

Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 9
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Note
If more than 1 CS is in Radio Signal Test mode, each CS must have a unique channel number.
4. After setting the DIP switches, connect the CS to an AC adaptor/battery box using a power supply adaptor.

WARNING
The AC adaptor should be connected to a vertically oriented or floor-mounted AC outlet. Do not
connect the AC adaptor to a ceiling-mounted AC outlet, as the weight of the adaptor may cause
it to become disconnected.

Notice
• For users in the United Kingdom:
240 V AC must not be used on a building site. Instead of an AC adaptor, connect a battery box to
the CS.
• If the Power Supply Select switch is set to ON in step 3, connect the CS to an AC adaptor/battery
box. If it is set to OFF, connect the CS to a DLC/DHLC card (KX-TDA0158CE only).

170 Installation Manual

 3.9.4 Before Site Survey

KX-TDA0158CE KX-TDA0141CE/KX-TDA0142CE

Modular
Modular
Telephone Cord
(PSJA1017Z) Telephone Cord
Power Supply Adaptor
(PSZZ1TDA0142) Power Supply Adaptor
(PSZZ1TDA0142)

To AC Adaptor (KX-A11)/
Battery Box (PSZZTD142CE) To AC Adaptor (KX-A11/KX-TCA1)/
Battery Box (PSZZTD142CE)

Modular

To DLC/DHLC card

Installation Manual 171

3.9.4 Before Site Survey

5. Install the CS temporarily for the site survey. Install the CS at least 2 m above the floor, and place the
antennas so that they are pointing in directions that are 90 degrees apart (for antenna diversity), as follows:

45º
90º

45º

At least 2 m

172 Installation Manual

 3.9.5 Site Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355/KX-TD7590

3.9.5 Site Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355/

KX-TD7590
The PS has a Radio Signal Test mode that monitors the state of the radio link to the CS for site survey. In
Radio Signal Test mode, the frame loss and signal strength of a synchronous slot, and the signal strength of
the other slots can be measured when the PS is monitoring the CS. After installing the CSs temporarily as
planned during site planning, set the PS to Radio Signal Test mode and locate each CS to measure its coverage
area. Then, record the results on the map of the installation site.

Testing the Radio Signal Strength

After locating the CS(s) temporarily, execute the Radio Signal Test using the PS. Directly after entering Radio
Signal Test mode, the PS scans channel 0 for a CS that it can connect to. The channel to be scanned can be
changed by pressing the appropriate keys 0 through 9.

1. Enter Radio Signal Test mode.

Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355
To survey other slots To survey specific channel
1 9 0 / Channel No.
Press 1, 9, and POWER Previous or Next 0 to 9
for more than 2 seconds.

Display example:
To store the scan data
RADIO STRENGTH RADIO STRENGTH
<<< MEASURING >>> CH0*1 SLOT:06*2 SYNC*3 Log No.
L:12*4 0000/0100*5
CS-ID:9005301234
0 to 9

Using the KX-TD7590

To survey other slots To survey specific channel
1 9 0 / Channel No.
Press 1, 9, and POWER Previous or Next 0 to 9
for more than 5 seconds.

Display example: To store the scan data

RADIO STRENGTH CH0*1 SLOT:06*2 SYNC*3
<<< MEASURING >>> L:12*4 0000/0100*5 Log No.
CS-ID:9005301234
0 to 9

*1 : Channel number
*2 : Slot number
*3 : When a slot is synchronised, "SYNC" is displayed.
*4 : Radio signal strength level
*5 : Frame error (0000 to 9999)/Frame counter (0000 to 9999). Frame error indicates the number of
errors out of 10 000 radio signal receptions. An increased number of frame errors indicates greater
radio signal interference and more frequent noise during conversation. The ideal number of frame
errors is "0000".

Installation Manual 173

3.9.5 Site Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355/KX-TD7590

Note
Storing the scan data will clear all directory data.
2. Measure the radio signal strength by moving towards and away from the CS.
Note
• When the error rate is 2% or more, measure the error rate at the same location at least 5 times.
You must disconnect the CS and then reconnect it to take each measurement. If the error rate is
consistently 2% or more, there may be interference from external wireless equipment. In this case,
the following may happen regardless of the radio signal strength level.

Error Rate Description

Approx. 2% May receive noise

Approx. 10% May fail to make/receive calls

The above is a rough standard, and may vary depending on the environment.
• When deciding where to install the CS, priority should be given to an error rate rather than a radio
signal strength level.
• After installing the CS according to the results of the survey, confirm that calls can be made and
received, and conversations can be heard clearly.
a. Move to the CS until the radio signal strength level becomes "12".
b. Move away from the CS and identify the CS coverage area within which the radio signal strength level
is greater than "8". Draw the area on the map.
c. Move away from the CS and identify the CS coverage area within which the radio signal strength level
is greater than "3". Draw the area on the map.

PS CH0
L:12
Channel no. 0

PS CH0
L:08
PS CH0
L:03

Radio Signal Strength Levels

Level: 00 Out of range
Level: 01 to 02 Receives noise easily or disconnects
Level: 03 to 07 May receive noise
Level: 08 to 10 Good
Level: 11 to 12 Better

174 Installation Manual

 3.9.5 Site Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355/KX-TD7590

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for other CSs, and relocate the CSs when necessary.
a. Overlap adjacent CS coverage areas where the radio signal strength level is "8" by 5 m to 10 m.

Channel no. 0 Channel no. 1

5 m to 10 m

b. Overlap the CS coverage areas of at least 2 CSs at any location in the installation site.

Channel no. 0 Channel no. 1

Channel no. 2 Channel no. 3

c. Make sure that the radio signal strength level is greater than "3" at any location in the service area
required by the user.

Note
• If a channel is set, the results of measurement for the 24 slots on the channel are saved each time.
If the same channel is set, the new results override the previous ones. Therefore, a measurement
of 10 channels ´ 24 slots in total can be made.
• If correct results cannot be obtained (e.g., there are many frame errors), change the location of the
CS and repeat the site survey to select the best location.

Installation Manual 175

3.9.5 Site Survey Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355/KX-TD7590

Referring to the Stored Scan Data

Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355

1 9 1 Log No.
Press 1, 9, and POWER 0 to 9
for more than 2 seconds.

To go to other slots To go to specific channel

A a
/ Channel No.
Previous or Next 0 to 9

Using the KX-TD7590

1 9 1 Log No.
Press 1, 9, and POWER 0 to 9
for more than 5 seconds.
To go to other slots To go to specific channel

/ Channel No.
Previous or Next 0 to 9

Clearing the Stored Scan Data

When "CLEAR SCAN DATA" is displayed after turning on the PS, you are required to clear the scan data.

Using the KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355

1 9 GHI 4

Press 1, 9, and POWER

for more than 2 seconds.

Using the KX-TD7590

1 9 GHI 4

Press 1, 9, and POWER

for more than 5 seconds.

176 Installation Manual

 3.9.6 After Site Survey

3.9.6 After Site Survey

After obtaining the proper measurement results, exit Radio Signal Test mode before connecting the CS to the
PBX.
1. Hold down the POWER button on the PS until the PS is turned OFF.
2. Disconnect the CS from the AC adaptor/battery box or the CSIF/DLC/DHLC card to stop supplying
electricity.
KX-TDA0158CE KX-TDA0141CE/KX-TDA0142CE

3. Switch all DIP switches on the CS from ON to OFF.

KX-TDA0158CE KX-TDA0141CE/KX-TDA0142CE

ON OFF OFF ON
6 1
5 2
4 3
3 4
2 5
1 6

Installation Manual 177

3.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

3.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Using a CSIF Card
Refer to the following example to connect a CS to the PBX.

KX-TDA0142CE

CSIF8 Card

Port 1

Cable Maximum Distance

ø 0.4 mm: 444 m
ø 0.5 mm: 694 m
ø 0.6 mm: 1000 m
CAT 5: 694 m

CSIF card (RJ45)

Pin No. Signal Name
CS (RJ11) 1
Signal Name Pin No. 2
D1 1 3 D1
POWH 2 4 POWH
POWL 3 5 POWL
D2 4 6 D2
7
8

Accessories and User-supplied Items for the CS

Accessories (included): Screws ´ 2, Washers ´ 2, Ferrite core ´ 1
User-supplied (not included): RJ11 connector

Note
For details about CSIF card, refer to "3.6.1 CSIF4 Card (KX-TDA0143) and CSIF8 Card (KX-TDA0144)".

178 Installation Manual

 3.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Using a DHLC/DLC Card

Refer to the following examples to connect a CS to the PBX.

KX-TDA0158CE

DHLC8 Card

Cable Maximum Distance

ø 0.4 mm: 222 m
ø 0.5 mm: 347 m
ø 0.6 mm: 500 m
CAT 5: 347 m

CS 1 (RJ45) DHLC/DLC card (Amphenol)

Signal Name Pin No. Signal Name
D1C 1
D2C 2
D1B 3
D1A 4 D1B
Master
D2A 5 D2B
D2B 6 D1C
D1D 7 D2C
D2D 8 D1D
D2D
CS 2 (RJ45) D1E
D2E
Signal Name Pin No.
D1F
D1C 1
D2F
D2C 2
D1G
D1B 3
4 D2G
D1A
Master D1H
D2A 5
D2H
D2B 6
D1D 7
D2D 8

Accessories and User-supplied Items for the CS

Accessories (included): Screws ´ 2, Washers ´ 2
User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector

Installation Manual 179

3.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Note
• The no. 4 and no. 5 pins (Master) of the CS must be connected to a pair of pins on the DHLC/DLC
card. Then use 4 consecutive pairs of pins on the DHLC/DLC card, starting with the pins corresponding
to the Master, as in the example above.
• When connecting multiple KX-TDA0158CE CSs to a DHLC/DLC card, make sure that the no. 4 and
no. 5 pins (Master) of adjacent CSs are at least 3 pairs of pins away on the card.
• CS connections must be made within the same DHLC/DLC card.
• When a wrong connection is made, satisfactory performance of the CS cannot be guaranteed. Check
the connection of CS and the PBX using the Maintenance Console. For information about how to view
CS information using the Maintenance Console, refer to "2.6.15 Utility—CS Information" in the PC
Programming Manual.

KX-TDA0141CE

DHLC8 Card

Cable Maximum Distance

ø 0.4 mm: 222 m
ø 0.5 mm: 347 m
ø 0.6 mm: 500 m
CAT 5: 347 m

CS (RJ11)
Signal Name Pin No. DHLC/DLC card (Amphenol)
D1 1 Signal Name
2 D1
3 D2
D2 4

Accessories and User-supplied Items for the CS

Accessories (included): Screws ´ 2, Washers ´ 2
User-supplied (not included): RJ11 connector

Note
For details about DHLC card or DLC card, refer to "3.6.2 DHLC8 Card (KX-TDA0170)", "3.6.3 DLC8 Card
(KX-TDA0171)", or "3.6.4 DLC16 Card (KX-TDA0172)".

180 Installation Manual

 3.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Connecting the CS
1. Connect the cable from the CSIF/DHLC/DLC card to the CS.
KX-TDA0158CE KX-TDA0141CE/KX-TDA0142CE

Modular Modular
To DHLC/DLC card To CSIF/DHLC/DLC card

2. Pass the cable through the groove of the CS (in any direction depending on your preference).
KX-TDA0158CE KX-TDA0141CE/KX-TDA0142CE

To DHLC/DLC card To CSIF/DHLC/DLC card

Installation Manual 181

3.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

For the KX-TDA0142CE User only:

3. Wrap the cable once around the ferrite core. Then close the case of the ferrite core.

To CSIF card

Note
If you need to open the ferrite core, use a flathead screwdriver to unlatch the case of the ferrite core.

182 Installation Manual

 3.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Registering the PS
The PS must be registered to the PBX before it can be used. Programming of both the PS and PBX is required.
A PT with multiline display (e.g., KX-T7636 6-line display) is required to perform the PBX system programming.

Note
For details about system programming using a PT, refer to "2.3.2 PT Programming" in the Feature Guide,
and "2.1 PT Programming" in the PT Programming Manual.

Entering the PBX System Programming Mode Using a PT

Administrator Level

System Password for Administrator—

# for PT Programming Programming No.
PROGRAM/
PAUSE
= 1234 3 digits

Note
means default value.

PS Registration
One PS can be registered to a maximum of 4 different PBXs.

[690] PS No. Extn. No. To the PS

operation
001 to 128 1 to 4 digits below END
ENTER ENTER (HOLD)

Using the KX-TCA155/KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355

Press POWER Select Select

for 2 seconds. "Setting Handset". "Registration".

"Please wait".

Select Select
"Register H/set". "Base 1–4".

"Enter Base PIN". PIN for PS Registration

C.Tone
4 digits

Installation Manual 183

3.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Using the KX-TD7590

System lock can be set after PS registration. When system lock is enabled, the system lock password will be
required for system setting.

F F
Press POWER
for 5 seconds.

To register for the first time

SELECT
/
Select
"INITIAL SETTING".
OR

To re-register If required
SELECT SELECT
/ / System Lock Password /OK
Select Select "DECT- 4 digits
"PS-PROGRAM". SYS SETTING".
SELECT SELECT PIN for
/ / PS Registration /OK
Select Select C.Tone
4 digits
"REGISTRATION". "DECT-SYS1-4"
To set system lock
SELECT
/ System Lock Password /OK
ENABLE
Choose
"ENABLE/DISABLE". 4 digits
DISABLE

System Lock Password /OK

4 digits

Using the KX-TD7580

/ /
Press POWER Select Select
for 2 seconds. "Setting Handset". "Registration".

/ / PIN for
PS Registration C.Tone
Select Select
"Register H/set". "Base 1–4". 4 digits

184 Installation Manual

 3.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Setting the Personal Identification Number (PIN) for PS Registration

To prevent registering the PS to a wrong PBX, a PIN for PS registration can be set to the PBX. Before registering
the PS to the PBX, enter the PIN set to the PBX into the PS. By doing so, the PS will only be registered to the
PBX with the matching PIN.

Note
• By default, the PIN for PS registration is "1234" for both the PBX and PS. Therefore, the PS can be
registered to the PBX without setting the PIN.
• The PIN for PS registration will only be used when registering the PS to the PBX. Therefore, during
normal operation after registration, even if there is more than 1 PBX with the same PIN near the PS,
the PS will not be inadvertently linked to a different PBX.
Setting the PIN for PBX

[692] PIN for PS Registration

4 digits END
ENTER 1234 ENTER (HOLD)

Changing the Display Language of the PS

Using the KX-TCA155/KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355

Press POWER Select Select

for 2 seconds. "Setting Handset". "Display Option".

Select Select the desired

"Select Language". language.

Using the KX-TD7590

SELECT SELECT
F 0 / /
Press POWER Select Select
for 5 seconds. "DISPLAY SETTING". "LANGUAGE".
SELECT SELECT
/
Select the desired
language.

Using the KX-TD7580

/ /
Press POWER Select Select
for 2 seconds. "Setting Handset". "Display Option".

/ /
Select "Select Select the desired
Language". language.

PS Termination
Confirm the following before cancelling the PS registration:
• The PS is turned on.

Installation Manual 185

3.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

• The PS is within range.

[691] PS No.
001 to 128
ENTER ENTER

If "Rejected" or "Time out" is displayed

CLEAR YES To the PS

operation
END below
Press "CLEAR". Press "YES". (HOLD)

If the registration information is still stored in the PS

Using the KX-TCA155/KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355

Press POWER Select Select Select

for 2 seconds. "Setting Handset". "Registration". "Cancel Base".

Handset PIN
C.Tone
4 digits
Select Select
"Base 1–4". "YES".

Using the KX-TD7590

SELECT
F 0 /
Press POWER Select "DECT-
for 5 seconds. SYS SETTING".
If required
SELECT
System Lock Password /OK / /
Select "CANCEL Select the
4 digits desired item.
DECT-SYS".
SELECT SELECT
/
Select "YES". C.Tone

Using the KX-TD7580

/ /
Press POWER Select Select
for 2 seconds. "Setting Handset". "Registration".

/ Handset PIN /
Select 4 digits Select the
"Cancel Base". desired item.

/
C.Tone
Select "YES".

Testing the Operation

Walk around the service area while having a conversation using a registered PS. If noise is frequent or
conversations disconnect, relocate the CSs or install an additional CS.

186 Installation Manual

 3.9.8 Wall Mounting

3.9.8 Wall Mounting

Mounting the KX-TDA0158CE
WARNING
• Make sure that the wall that the unit will be attached to is strong enough to support the unit
(approx. 310 g). If not, it is necessary for the wall to be reinforced.
• Only use the wall-mounting equipment (screws, washers) included with the unit.
• When driving the screws into the wall, be careful to avoid touching any metal laths, wire laths
or metal plates in the wall.
• When this product is no longer in use, make sure to detach it from the wall.

CAUTION
• Do not stretch or bend the cables. Also, do not allow anything to rest on the cables.
• Use cables that are fire-resistant or fireproof.
• The CS and the cables should never be placed near or over a radiator or other heat source.
• Do not bundle cables that are connected to the CS with the AC power cords of machines located
nearby.
• Make sure the cables are securely fastened to the wall.

1. Place the reference for wall mounting (KX-TDA0158CE) on the wall to mark the 2 screw positions.
2. Install the 2 screws and washers (included) into the wall.
Note
• Make sure that the screw heads are at the same distance from the wall.
• Install the screws perpendicular to the wall.
3. Hook the CS on the screw heads.

Washer

Drive the screw

to this point.

Installation Manual 187

3.9.8 Wall Mounting

4. Place the antennas so that they are pointing in directions that are 90 degrees apart (for antenna diversity),
as follows:

45º

90º

45º

Reference for Wall Mounting (KX-TDA0158CE)

Please copy this page and use as a reference for wall mounting.

Install a screw here.

83 mm

Install a screw here.

Note
Make sure to set the print size to correspond with the size of this page. If the dimension of the paper output
still deviates slightly from the measurement indicated here, use the measurement indicated here.

188 Installation Manual

 3.9.8 Wall Mounting

Mounting the KX-TDA0141CE/KX-TDA0142CE

WARNING
• Make sure that the wall that the unit will be attached to is strong enough to support the unit
(approx. 310 g). If not, it is necessary for the wall to be reinforced.
• Only use the wall-mounting equipment (screws, washers) included with the unit.
• When driving the screws into the wall, be careful to avoid touching any metal laths, wire laths
or metal plates in the wall.
• When this product is no longer in use, make sure to detach it from the wall.

CAUTION
• Do not stretch or bend the cables. Also, do not allow anything to rest on the cables.
• Use cables that are fire-resistant or fireproof.
• The CS and the cables should never be placed near or over a radiator or other heat source.
• Do not bundle cables that are connected to the CS with the AC power cords of machines located
nearby.
• Make sure the cables are securely fastened to the wall.

1. Place the reference for wall mounting (KX-TDA0141CE/KX-TDA0142CE) on the wall to mark the 2 screw
positions.
2. Install the 2 screws and washers (included) into the wall.
Note
• Make sure that the screw heads are at the same distance from the wall.
• Install the screws perpendicular to the wall.
3. Hook the CS on the screw heads.

Washer

Drive the screw

to this point.

Installation Manual 189

3.9.8 Wall Mounting

4. Place the antennas so that they are pointing in directions that are 90 degrees apart (for antenna diversity),
as follows:

45º

90º

45º

Reference for Wall Mounting (KX-TDA0141CE/KX-TDA0142CE)

Please copy this page and use as a reference for wall mounting.

Install a screw here.

71 mm

Install a screw here.

Note
Make sure to set the print size to correspond with the size of this page. If the dimension of the paper output
still deviates slightly from the measurement indicated here, use the measurement indicated here.

190 Installation Manual

 3.10.1 Overview

3.10 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations

3.10.1 Overview
Required Equipment and Maximum Number of Calls
CSs determine the area covered by the wireless system. The number of calls that can be made simultaneously
through each CS varies depending on the model, as follows:

CS Connection Card Maximum Calls Compatible PSs

KX-TDA0151 DHLC/DLC 2 • KX-TD7684

KX-TDA0152 CSIF 3
• KX-TD7694
• KX-TD7680
KX-TDA0141 DHLC/DLC 2 • KX-TD7690
KX-TDA0142 CSIF 3

Note
For more details about the PS, refer to the Operating Instructions of the PS.

Required Distances between Equipment

CAUTION
• Keeping some distance between the equipment listed below may prevent interference. (The distance
may vary depending on the environment.)

Equipment Distance

CS and office equipment such as a computer, telex, fax More than 2 m

machine, etc.
CS and PS More than 1 m
Each PS More than 0.5 m
PBX and CS More than 2 m
CS and CS More than 15 m*1

*1
KX-TDA0151CN: More than 3 m
• The CS should be kept free of dust, moisture, high temperature (more than 40 °C), low temperature
(less than 0 °C), and vibration, and should not be exposed to direct sunlight.
• The CS should not be placed outdoors (use indoors).
• The CS should not be placed near high-voltage equipment.
• The CS should not be placed on a metal object.
• Systems using 2.4 GHz ISM (Industrial, Scientific and Medical) band may interfere with the KX-TDA
wireless system. Examples of such systems are cordless telephones, wireless LAN, Home RF,
microwave ovens and other ISM devices. These systems may cause minor noise.

Notice
Please take into consideration the distance between the CSs when site planning. Please consult a certified
dealer for details.

Installation Manual 191

3.10.1 Overview

However, the required distance between CSs may vary depending on the environment of the installation
site and conditions in which the wireless system is used. Conduct the site survey to determine the
appropriate distance.

192 Installation Manual

 3.10.2 Procedure Overview

3.10.2 Procedure Overview

When connecting the wireless system, use extreme care in conducting the site survey. An incorrectly performed
site survey can result in poor service area, frequent noise, and disconnection of calls.

1. Investigate the installation site

Refer to "3.10.3 Site Planning".
a. Obtain a map of the CS installation site.
b. Identify the service area required by the user on the map.
c. Plan the location of each CS, taking account of distance, building materials, etc.

2. Prepare the CS for site survey

Refer to "3.10.4 Before Site Survey".
a. Assign a CS number to each CS by setting the DIP switches on the back of the CS.
b. Supply electricity to each CS using an AC adaptor/battery box or by connecting them to a CSIF/DLC/
DHLC card.
c. Install each CS temporarily as planned.
Note
• Install at least 2 m above the floor.
• Place the antennas so that they are pointing in directions that are 90 degrees apart (for antenna
diversity).

3. Conduct the site survey

Refer to "3.10.5 Site Survey".
a. Test the radio signal strength using the PS.
Confirm that the radio signal strength level is "12" near the CS.

Using the KX-TD7684/KX-TD7694

Display example:

1 9 0 CS No. << SEARCHING >>

CS NO.1 LEVEL:12

Press 1, 9, and POWER SAVE:0123456789

for more than 2 seconds. 1 to 9

Using the KX-TD7680

Display example:
1 9 0 CS No. CS NO.1 LEVEL:12
<< SEARCHING >>
SAVE:0123456789
Press 1, 9, and POWER 1 to 9
for more than 2 seconds.

Installation Manual 193

3.10.2 Procedure Overview

Using the KX-TD7690

Display example:
1 9 CS No. CS NO.1 LEVEL:12
<< SEARCHING >>
SAVE:0123456789
Press 1, 9, and POWER 1 to 9
for more than 2 seconds.

b. By walking away from the CS with the PS, check the radio signal strength. The radio signal strength
weakens as you walk away from the CS.
c. Map the CS coverage area at radio signal strength levels "3" and "8".
d. Make sure that adjacent CS coverage areas overlap where the radio signal strength level is "8" by at least
5 m.
e. Make sure that the radio signal strength level is greater than "3" at any location within the service area
required by the user.

4. Finish the site survey

Refer to "3.10.6 After Site Survey".
1. Turn off the PS.
2. Stop supplying power, and return all DIP switches of each CS to the OFF position.

5. Connect the CS and PS to the PBX and test the operation

Refer to "3.10.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX".
1. Connect the CSs to the PBX.
2. Register the PSs to the PBX.
3. Walk around the service area while having a conversation using a registered PS. If noise is frequent or
conversations disconnect, relocate the CSs or install an additional CS.

6. Mount the CS on the wall

Refer to "3.10.8 Wall Mounting".
a. If there are no problems in testing, mount the CS on the wall.

194 Installation Manual

 3.10.3 Site Planning

3.10.3 Site Planning

Choosing the best site for the CS requires careful planning and testing of essential areas. The best location
may not always be convenient for installation. Read the following information before installing the unit.

Understanding Radio Waves

Characteristics of Radio Waves
The transmission of radio waves and the CS coverage area depend on the structure and materials of the
building.
Office equipment, such as computers and fax machines, can interfere with radio waves. Such equipment may
create noise or interfere with the performance of the PS.
The illustration below shows the special transmitting patterns of radio waves.
1. Radio waves are reflected by objects made of materials such as metal.
2. Radio waves are diffracted by objects such as metallic columns.
3. Radio waves penetrate objects made of materials such as glass.

1. Reflection
CS

Column

2. Diffraction

3. Penetration

Relationships Between Radio Waves and Building Structure and Materials

• The CS coverage area is affected more by the building materials and their thickness than the number of
obstacles.
• Radio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted by conductive objects and rarely penetrate them.
• Radio waves tend to penetrate insulated objects and are rarely reflected by them.
• Radio waves penetrate thin objects more than thick objects.
• The table below shows the transmission tendency of radio waves when they reach objects made from
various materials.

Object Material Transmission Tendency

Wall Concrete The thicker they are, the less radio waves penetrate them.
Ferroconcrete Radio waves can penetrate them, but the more iron there
is, the more radio waves are reflected.

Installation Manual 195

3.10.3 Site Planning

Object Material Transmission Tendency

Window Glass Radio waves usually penetrate them.

Glass with wire net Radio waves can penetrate them, but tend to be reflected.
Glass covered with Radio waves are weakened considerably when they
heat-resistant film penetrate windows.
Floor Ferroconcrete Radio waves can penetrate them, but the more iron there
is, the more radio waves are reflected.
Partition Steel Radio waves are reflected and rarely penetrate them.
Plywood, Glass Radio waves usually penetrate them.
Column Ferroconcrete Radio waves can penetrate them, but the more iron there
is, the more radio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted.
Metal Radio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted.
Cabinet Steel Radio waves are usually reflected or diffracted, and rarely
penetrate them.
Wood Radio waves can penetrate them, but they are weakened.

196 Installation Manual

 3.10.3 Site Planning

CS Coverage Area
The example below shows the size of the coverage area of 1 CS if it is installed in an area with no obstacles.

Note
Radio signal strength levels are measured during the site survey (refer to "3.10.5 Site Survey").

A Coverage Area
Radio signal strength level is
greater than "3".
(About 50 m to 60 m*1)
A

B
B Good Coverage Area
Radio signal strength
level is greater than "8".
(About 30 m to 40 m*2)
Good sound quality
can be maintained.
Gray Zone:
Conversation will be
intermittent C Out of Service:
Cannot make/receive calls

Radio Signal Strength Levels

Level: 00 Out of range
Level: 01 to 02 Receives noise easily or disconnects
Level: 03 to 07 May receive noise
Level: 08 to 10 Good
Level: 11 to 12 Better

*1 KX-TDA0151CN: About 35 m to 50 m
*2 KX-TDA0151CN: About 20 m to 30 m

Site Survey Preparation

1. Obtain a map and investigate the installation site.
a. Check the obstacles (e.g., shelves, columns, and partitions).
b. Check the materials of the structures (e.g., metal, concrete, and plywood).
c. Check the layout and dimensions of the room, corridor, etc.
d. Write down the above information on the map.
2. Examine the service area required by the user on the map, referring to the following example.
a. Draw the coverage area around a CS. Extend the coverage area 30 m to 60 m (20 m to 50 m for the
KX-TDA0151CN) in each direction, depending on the materials of the building structures and obstacles
in the installation site. Note that a CS cannot be installed outside a building.

Installation Manual 197

3.10.3 Site Planning

b. If one CS cannot cover the entire service area, install additional CSs as required. Overlap the coverage
areas of adjacent CSs.
Where CS coverage areas overlap, the PS will start call handover to the next CS if the signal from one
CS becomes weak. However, if a PS moves away from a CS and there are no CSs available for
handover, the PS may go out of range and the call could be lost.
If the signal from the CS fades, due to the structure of the building, there may be some handover delay.
The user will hear a range warning before handover in this case. This also applies in the case of
interference from 2.4 GHz apparatus.

Example: Installing in a Room Separated by Interior Walls

Things to take note of:
• The room is separated by interior walls.
• The room is surrounded by concrete walls.
CS installation plan:
• The coverage area of each CS will not extend as far as when there are no obstacles, because the radio
signals will be weakened by separating walls. Therefore, you will need 5 CSs to cover the entire room.

150 m*1

70 m*2

CS no. 1

CS no. 2

CS no. 5

CS no. 3 CS no. 4

*1 KX-TDA0151CN: 100 m
*2 KX-TDA0151CN: 50 m

198 Installation Manual

 3.10.4 Before Site Survey

3.10.4 Before Site Survey

Setting and Installing the CS Temporarily for Site Survey
1. Switch the Radio Signal Test switch from OFF to ON.
2. Set the CS number switches as desired.
3. Set the Power Supply Select switch as desired (KX-TDA0151/KX-TDA0152 only).
KX-TDA0151/KX-TDA0152
1 2 3 4

CS no. 1

1 2 3 4

CS no. 2

1 2 3 4

CS no. 3

1 2 3 4

CS no. 4

1 2 3 4

CS no. 5

1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 CS no. 6
ON
1 2 3 4
DIP Switch
CS no. 7
OFF
1 2 3 4
CS Number Switch
CS no. 8
Power Supply Select Switch
ON: From the Battery Box 1 2 3 4
OFF: From the PBX
CS no. 9
Radio Signal Test Switch

Installation Manual 199

3.10.4 Before Site Survey

KX-TDA0141/KX-TDA0142
DIP Switch
OFF ON

2
CS Number Switch
3

4
Keep this switch at the default
5 "OFF" position. Otherwise, the
CS will not function.
6 Radio Signal
Test Switch

CS no. 1 CS no. 2 CS no. 3 CS no. 4 CS no. 5 CS no. 6 CS no. 7 CS no. 8 CS no. 9

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Note
If more than 1 CS is in Radio Signal Test mode, each CS must have a unique CS number.

200 Installation Manual

 3.10.4 Before Site Survey

4. After setting the DIP switches, connect the CS to an AC adaptor/battery box using a power supply adaptor.

WARNING
The AC adaptor should be connected to a vertically oriented or floor-mounted AC outlet. Do not
connect the AC adaptor to a ceiling-mounted AC outlet, as the weight of the adaptor may cause
it to become disconnected.

Notice
If the Power Supply Select switch is set to ON in step 3, connect the CS to an AC adaptor/battery box.
If it is set to OFF, connect the CS to a CSIF/DLC/DHLC card (KX-TDA0151/KX-TDA0152 only).

KX-TDA0151/KX-TDA0152 KX-TDA0141/KX-TDA0142

Modular
Telephone Cord Modular
Telephone Cord

Power Supply Adaptor Power Supply Adaptor

(PSZZ1TDA0142) (PSZZ1TDA0142)

To AC Adaptor (KX-A11/KX-TCA1)/ To AC Adaptor (KX-A11/KX-TCA1)/

Battery Box (PSZZTD142CE)*1 Battery Box (PSZZTD142CE)

Modular

To CSIF/DLC/DHLC card

*1
KX-TDA0151CN: Battery Box (PSZZTD142CE) only. The AC Adaptor is not available.

Installation Manual 201

3.10.4 Before Site Survey

5. Install the CS temporarily for the site survey. Install the CS at least 2 m above the floor, and place the
antennas so that they are pointing in directions that are 90 degrees apart (for antenna diversity), as follows:

45º
90º

45º

At least 2 m

202 Installation Manual

 3.10.5 Site Survey

3.10.5 Site Survey

The PS has a Radio Signal Test mode that monitors the state of the radio link to the CS. After installing the
CSs temporarily, set the PS to Radio Signal Test mode and measure each CS coverage area. Then, record
the results on the map of the installation site.

Testing the Radio Signal Strength

Note
Display prompts for the site survey are only available in English.
1. Enter Radio Signal Test mode.
Using the KX-TD7684/KX-TD7694

Display example:
CS NO.1 LEVEL:12*1
1 9 0 CS No. << SEARCHING >>
Press 1, 9, and POWER SAVE:0123456789*2
for more than 2 seconds. 1 to 9

To store the scan data

Scan Data No.
0 to 9

Using the KX-TD7680

Display example:
1 9 0 CS No. CS NO.1 LEVEL:12*1
<< SEARCHING >>
SAVE:0123456789*2
Press 1, 9, and POWER 1 to 9
for more than 2 seconds.

To store the scan data

Scan Data No.
0 to 9

Using the KX-TD7690

Display example:
1 9 0 CS No. CS NO.1 LEVEL:12*1
<< SEARCHING >>
SAVE:0123456789*2
Press 1, 9, and POWER 1 to 9
for more than 2 seconds.

To store the scan data

Scan Data No.
0 to 9

Note
*1: CS number and radio signal strength level.
*2: Scan data (test result) number. Empty memory space will be indicated by a number; stored memory
space will be indicated by a "-".

Installation Manual 203

3.10.5 Site Survey

2. Measure the radio signal strength by moving towards and away from the CS.
a. Move to the CS until the radio signal strength level becomes "12".
b. Move away from the CS and identify the CS coverage area within which the radio signal strength level
is greater than "8". Draw the area on the map.
c. Move away from the CS and identify the CS coverage area within which the radio signal strength level
is greater than "3". Draw the area on the map.

PS CS NO.1 LEVEL:12

CS no. 1

PS CS NO.1 LEVEL:8

PS CS NO.1 LEVEL:3

Radio Signal Strength Levels

Level: 00 Out of range
Level: 01 to 02 Receives noise easily or disconnects
Level: 03 to 07 May receive noise
Level: 08 to 10 Good
Level: 11 to 12 Better

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for other CSs, and relocate the CSs when necessary.
a. Overlap adjacent CS coverage areas where the radio signal strength level is "8" by 5 m to 10 m.

CS no. 1 CS no. 2
5 m to 10 m

204 Installation Manual

 3.10.5 Site Survey

b. Overlap the CS coverage areas of at least 2 CSs at any location in the installation site.

CS no. 1 CS no. 2

CS no. 3 CS no. 4

c. Make sure that the radio signal strength level is greater than "3" at any location in the service area
required by the user.

Referring to the Stored Scan Data

Using the KX-TD7684/KX-TD7694
Display example:
When there is scan data
1 9 1 Scan Data No. NO.1
CS No.2 LEVEL: 9
Press 1, 9, and POWER 0 to 9
for more than 2 seconds. When there is no scan data
NO.0
NOT SAVED
To the Desired Scan Data No.

Using the KX-TD7680

Display example:
When there is scan data
1 9 1 Scan Data No. NO.1
CS No.2 LEVEL: 9
Press 1, 9, and POWER 0 to 9
for more than 2 seconds. When there is no scan data
NO.0
NOT SAVED
To the Desired Scan Data No.

Installation Manual 205

3.10.5 Site Survey

Using the KX-TD7690

Display example:
When there is scan data
1 9 1 Scan Data No. NO.1
CS No.2 LEVEL: 9
Press 1, 9, and POWER 0 to 9
for more than 2 seconds. When there is no scan data
NO.0
NOT SAVED
To the Desired Scan Data No.

Deleting the Stored Scan Data

Using the KX-TD7684/KX-TD7694

1 9 2 Scan Data No.

Press 1, 9, and POWER 0 to 9, or # for all data
for more than 2 seconds.

To the Desired Scan Data No.

Using the KX-TD7680

1 9 2 Scan Data No.

Press 1, 9, and POWER 0 to 9, or # for all data
for more than 2 seconds.
To the Desired Scan Data No.

Using the KX-TD7690

1 9 2 Scan Data No.

Press 1, 9, and POWER 0 to 9, or # for all data
for more than 2 seconds.
To the Desired Scan Data No.

206 Installation Manual

 3.10.6 After Site Survey

3.10.6 After Site Survey

After obtaining the proper measurement results, exit Radio Signal Test mode before connecting the CS to the
PBX.
1. Hold down the POWER button on the PS until the PS is turned OFF.
2. Disconnect the CS from the AC adaptor/battery box or the CSIF/DLC/DHLC card to stop supplying
electricity.
KX-TDA0151/KX-TDA0152 KX-TDA0141/KX-TDA0142

3. Switch all DIP switches on the CS from ON to OFF.

KX-TDA0151/KX-TDA0152 KX-TDA0141/KX-TDA0142

OFF ON
1
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON 2
3
OFF 4
5
6

Installation Manual 207

3.10.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

3.10.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Using a CSIF Card
Refer to the following example to connect a CS to the PBX.

KX-TDA0152/KX-TDA0142

CSIF8 Card

Port 1

Cable Maximum Distance

ø 0.4 mm: 444 m
ø 0.5 mm: 694 m
ø 0.6 mm: 1000 m
CAT 5: 694 m

CSIF card (RJ45)

Pin No. Signal Name
CS (RJ11) 1
Signal Name Pin No. 2
D1 1 3 D1
POWH 2 4 POWH
POWL 3 5 POWL
D2 4 6 D2
7
8

Accessories and User-supplied Items for the CS

Accessories (included): Screws ´ 2, Washers ´ 2
User-supplied (not included): RJ11 connector

Note
For details about CSIF card, refer to "3.6.1 CSIF4 Card (KX-TDA0143) and CSIF8 Card (KX-TDA0144)".

208 Installation Manual

 3.10.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Using a DHLC/DLC Card

Refer to the following example to connect a CS to the PBX.

KX-TDA0151/KX-TDA0141

DHLC8 Card

Cable Maximum Distance

ø 0.4 mm: 222 m
ø 0.5 mm: 347 m
ø 0.6 mm: 500 m
CAT 5: 347 m

CS (RJ11)
DHLC/DLC card (Amphenol)
Signal Name Pin No.
D1 1 Signal Name
2 D1
3 D2
D2 4

Accessories and User-supplied Items for the CS

Accessories (included): Screws ´ 2, Washers ´ 2
User-supplied (not included): RJ11 connector

Note
For details about DHLC card or DLC card, refer to "3.6.2 DHLC8 Card (KX-TDA0170)", "3.6.3 DLC8 Card
(KX-TDA0171)", or "3.6.4 DLC16 Card (KX-TDA0172)".

Installation Manual 209

3.10.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Connecting the CS
1. Connect the cable from the CSIF/DHLC/DLC card to the CS.
KX-TDA0151/KX-TDA0152 KX-TDA0141/KX-TDA0142

Modular Modular
To CSIF/DHLC/DLC card To CSIF/DHLC/DLC card

2. Pass the cable through the groove of the CS (in any direction depending on your preference).
KX-TDA0151/KX-TDA0152 KX-TDA0141/KX-TDA0142

To CSIF/DHLC/DLC card To CSIF/DHLC/DLC card

210 Installation Manual

 3.10.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Registering the PS
The PS must be registered to the PBX before it can be used. Programming of both the PS and PBX is required.
A PT with multiline display (e.g., KX-T7636 6-line display) is required to perform the PBX system programming.

Note
For details about system programming using a PT, refer to "2.3.2 PT Programming" in the Feature Guide,
and "2.1 PT Programming" in the PT Programming Manual.

Entering the System Programming Mode

PT (Administrator Level)

System Password for Administrator—

# for PT Programming Programming No.
PROGRAM/
PAUSE
= 1234 3 digits

PS (Using the KX-TD7684/KX-TD7694)

Press POWER Select Select

for 2 seconds. "Setting Handset". "System Option".
If required
System Lock Password System Setting Menu
4 digits

PS (Using the KX-TD7680)

FUNC

Press POWER Select Select

for 2 seconds. "PS PROGRAM". "SYSTEM SET".
If required
System Lock Password System Setting Menu
4 digits

PS (Using the KX-TD7690)

MENU SEL SEL

Press POWER S1 Select S1 Select S1

for 2 seconds. "PS PROGRAM". "SYSTEM SETTING".
If required
ENTR
System Lock Password System Setting Menu
4 digits S1

Note
means default value throughout this section.

Installation Manual 211

3.10.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

PS Registration

[690] PS No. Extn. No. To the PS

operation
001 to 128 1 to 4 digits below END
ENTER ENTER (HOLD)

When the PS has not been registered yet

When registering the PS for the first time, it is possible to select the desired language for the display. (You do
not need to enter the PS system programming mode when registering for the first time.)
Using the KX-TD7684/KX-TD7694

C.Tone C.Tone
Press Press "F"
POWER for Select the desired for 2
2 seconds. language. seconds.

Using the KX-TD7680

[ F2 ] [ F3 ]

C.Tone
Press Press S2 repeatedly Press S3
POWER for to select the desired for 2
2 seconds. language. seconds.

Using the KX-TD7690

F2 F3

C.Tone
Press Press S2 repeatedly Press S3
POWER for to select the desired for 2
2 seconds. language. seconds.

When the PS has already been registered to another PBX

One PS can be registered to a maximum of 4 different PBXs.
Using the KX-TD7684/KX-TD7694

C.Tone
Select Choose
"Register H/S" "Base 1–4".

Using the KX-TD7680

C.Tone
Select Choose
"REGISTRATION". "SYSTEM 1–4".

Using the KX-TD7690

SEL SEL
C.Tone
Select S1 Choose S1
"REGISTRATION". "SYSTEM 1–4".

212 Installation Manual

 3.10.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Setting the System Lock

When a system lock has been set, the system lock password will be required for PS system setting.
Using the KX-TD7684/KX-TD7694

Select Choose "On/Off".

"System Lock".
System Lock Password System Lock Password
On
4 digits 4 digits
Off

C.Tone

Using the KX-TD7680

Choose
Select "Enable/Disable".
"SYSTEM LOCK".
System Lock Password System Lock Password
ENABLE
4 digits 4 digits
DISABLE

C.Tone

Using the KX-TD7690

SEL CHNG

Choose
Select S1 S1 "Enable/Disable".
"SYSTEM LOCK".
SEL ENTR
System Lock Password System Lock Password
ENABLE
S1 4 digits S1 4 digits
DISABLE

ENTR
C.Tone
S1

Installation Manual 213

3.10.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Setting the Personal Identification Number (PIN) for PS Registration

To prevent registering the PS to a wrong PBX, a PIN for PS registration can be set to the PBX. Before registering
the PS to the PBX, enter the PIN set to the PBX into the PS. By doing so, the PS will only be registered to the
PBX with the matching PIN.

Note
• By default, the PIN for PS registration is "1234" for both the PBX and PS. Therefore, the PS can be
registered to the PBX without setting the PIN.
• The PIN for PS registration will only be used when registering the PS to the PBX. Therefore, during
normal operation after registration, even if there is more than 1 PBX with the same PIN near the PS,
the PS will not be inadvertently linked to a different PBX.
Setting the PIN for PBX

[692] PIN for PS Registration

4 digits END
ENTER 1234 ENTER (HOLD)

Setting the PIN for PS

Using the KX-TD7684/KX-TD7694

PIN for PS Registration

C.Tone
Select 1 to 8 digits
"Change PIN" 1234

Using the KX-TD7680

PIN for PS Registration

C.Tone
Select 1 to 4 digits
"CHANGE PIN" 1234

Using the KX-TD7690

SEL ENTR
PIN for PS Registration
C.Tone
Select 1 to 4 digits
"CHANGE PIN" S1 S1
1234

214 Installation Manual

 3.10.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

PS Termination
Confirm the following before cancelling the PS registration:
• The PS is turned on.
• The PS is within range.

[691] PS No.
001 to 128
ENTER ENTER

If "Rejected" or "Time out" is displayed

CLEAR YES To the PS

operation
END below
Press "CLEAR". Press "YES". (HOLD)

If the registration information is still stored in the PS

Using the KX-TD7684/KX-TD7694

Select "Cancel Base". Select "Base 1-4".

C.Tone
Select "Yes".

Using the KX-TD7680

Select "DELETE Select the Select "YES".

SYSTEM". desired item.

C.Tone

Using the KX-TD7690

SEL SEL

Select "DELETE Select the Select "YES".

S1 S1
SYSTEM". desired item.
SEL
C.Tone
S1

Testing the Operation

Walk around the service area while having a conversation using a registered PS. If noise is frequent or
conversations disconnect, relocate the CSs or install an additional CS.

Installation Manual 215

3.10.8 Wall Mounting

3.10.8 Wall Mounting

Mounting the KX-TDA0151/KX-TDA0152
WARNING
• Make sure that the wall that the unit will be attached to is strong enough to support the unit
(approx. 310 g). If not, it is necessary for the wall to be reinforced.
• Only use the wall-mounting equipment (screws, washers, wall mounting plate) included with
the unit.
• When driving the screws into the wall, be careful to avoid touching any metal laths, wire laths
or metal plates in the wall.
• When this product is no longer in use, make sure to detach it from the wall.

CAUTION
• Do not stretch or bend the cables. Also, do not allow anything to rest on the cables.
• Use cables that are fire-resistant or fireproof.
• The CS and the cables should never be placed near or over a radiator or other heat source.
• Do not bundle cables that are connected to the CS with the AC power cords of machines located
nearby.
• Make sure the cables are securely fastened to the wall.

1. Place the reference for wall mounting (KX-TDA0151/KX-TDA0152) on the wall to mark the 2 screw
positions.
2. Install the 2 screws and washers (included) into the wall.
Note
• Make sure that the screw heads are at the same distance from the wall.
• Install the screws perpendicular to the wall.
3. Insert the upper and lower tabs of the wall mounting plate into the designated openings in the base unit.
KX-TDA0151/KX-TDA0152

Tabs

216 Installation Manual

 3.10.8 Wall Mounting

4. Slide the wall mounting plate in the direction of the arrow until it clicks.
KX-TDA0151/KX-TDA0152

5. Hook the CS on the screw heads.

KX-TDA0151/KX-TDA0152

Washer

Drive the screw

to this point.

6. Place the antennas so that they are pointing in directions that are 90 degrees apart (for antenna diversity),
as follows:

45º

90º

45º

Installation Manual 217

3.10.8 Wall Mounting

Reference for Wall Mounting (KX-TDA0151/KX-TDA0152)

Please copy this page and use as a reference for wall mounting.

Install a screw here.

83 mm

Install a screw here.

Note
Make sure to set the print size to correspond with the size of this page. If the dimension of the paper output
still deviates slightly from the measurement indicated here, use the measurement indicated here.

218 Installation Manual

 3.10.8 Wall Mounting

Mounting the KX-TDA0141/KX-TDA0142

WARNING
• Make sure that the wall that the unit will be attached to is strong enough to support the unit
(approx. 310 g). If not, it is necessary for the wall to be reinforced.
• Only use the wall-mounting equipment (screws, washers) included with the unit.
• When driving the screws into the wall, be careful to avoid touching any metal laths, wire laths
or metal plates in the wall.
• When this product is no longer in use, make sure to detach it from the wall.

CAUTION
• Do not stretch or bend the cables. Also, do not allow anything to rest on the cables.
• Use cables that are fire-resistant or fireproof.
• The CS and the cables should never be placed near or over a radiator or other heat source.
• Do not bundle cables that are connected to the CS with the AC power cords of machines located
nearby.
• Make sure the cables are securely fastened to the wall.

1. Place the reference for wall mounting (KX-TDA0141/KX-TDA0142) on the wall to mark the 2 screw
positions.
2. Install the 2 screws and washers (included) into the wall.
Note
• Make sure that the screw heads are at the same distance from the wall.
• Install the screws perpendicular to the wall.
3. Hook the CS on the screw heads.

Washer

Drive the screw

to this point.

Installation Manual 219

3.10.8 Wall Mounting

4. Place the antennas so that they are pointing in directions that are 90 degrees apart (for antenna diversity),
as follows:

45º

90º

45º

Reference for Wall Mounting (KX-TDA0141/KX-TDA0142)

Please copy this page and use as a reference for wall mounting.

Install a screw here.

71 mm

Install a screw here.

Note
Make sure to set the print size to correspond with the size of this page. If the dimension of the paper output
still deviates slightly from the measurement indicated here, use the measurement indicated here.

220 Installation Manual

 3.11.1 Overview

3.11 Connection of DECT 6.0 Portable Stations

3.11.1 Overview
Names and Locations of CS
Antennas

CS ID Number
(ID: xxxxxxxxxx)

LED

LED Indications
Indication Colour Description

STATUS Green/Red CS status indication

• OFF: Power Off
• Green ON: Stand-by (no active calls)
• Slow Green Flashing (60 times per minute): Talk (active calls)
• Moderate Green Flashing (120 times per minute): Busy
• Red ON: Fault (includes Initialisation)
• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): Out of Service/Starting up

CS status indication during the site survey

• Red ON: The CS is connected to an AC adaptor/battery box.
• Red Flashing (60 times per minute): The CS is connected to the
PBX.

Required Equipment and Maximum Number of Calls

CSs determine the area covered by the wireless system. The number of calls that can be made simultaneously
through each CS varies depending on the model, as follows:

CS Connection Card Maximum Calls Compatible PSs

KX-TDA0155 DHLC/DLC 2 • KX-TD7685

KX-TDA0158 DHLC/DLC 8
• KX-TD7695

Note
For more details about the PS, refer to the Operating Instructions of the PS.

Installation Manual 221

3.11.1 Overview

Required Distances between Equipment

Maintain the distances listed below between equipment in order to prevent noise, interference or the
disconnection of a conversation. (The distance may vary depending on the environment.)

Equipment Distance

CS and office equipment such as a computer, telex, fax More than 2 m

machine, etc.
CS and PS More than 1 m
Each CS More than 3 m
Each PS More than 0.5 m
PBX and CS More than 2 m

If multiple CSs cover the same area, the phone connection may become noisy or the number of possible
simultaneous calls with PSs may decrease due to interference between the CSs. For details, refer
to "3.11.5 Site Survey—Testing the Radio Signal Strength".
The required distance between CSs may vary depending on the environment of the installation site and
conditions in which the wireless system is used. Conduct a site survey to determine the appropriate distance.

RF Specification
Item Description

Radio Access Method MultiCarrier TDMA-TDD

Frequency Band 1920 MHz to 1930 MHz
Number of Carriers 5
Carrier Spacing 1728 kHz
Bit Rate 1152 kbps
Carrier Multiplex TDMA, 24 (Tx12, Rx12) slots per frame
Frame Length 10 ms
Modulation Scheme GFSK
Roll-off factor=0.5 50 % roll-off in the transmitter
Data Coding for Modulator Differential Coding
Voice CODEC 32 kbps ADPCM (CCITT G.726)
Transmission Output Peak 0.12 W

CAUTION
• The CS should be kept free of dust, moisture, high temperature (more than 40 °C), low temperature
(less than 0 °C), and vibration, and should not be exposed to direct sunlight.
• The CS should not be placed outdoors (use indoors).
• The CS should not be placed near high-voltage equipment.
• The CS should not be placed on a metal object.

222 Installation Manual

 3.11.2 Procedure Overview

3.11.2 Procedure Overview

When connecting the wireless system, use extreme care in conducting the site survey. An incorrectly performed
site survey can result in poor service area, frequent noise, and disconnection of calls.

Notice
• When installing the DECT 6.0 wireless system in an area where another wireless system (2.4 GHz) is
already installed, it is necessary to reconduct the site survey to find the optimum position for the CS.
If you install the new CS in the same position as the old CS, it may result in a poor service area, frequent
noise, and disconnection of calls.
• In this case, it is necessary to perform system initialisation. For details about the system initialisation
procedure, refer to "3.16 Starting the PBX".

1. Investigate the installation site

Refer to "3.11.3 Site Planning".
a. Obtain a map of the CS installation site.
b. Identify the service area required by the user on the map.
c. Plan the location of each CS, taking account of distance, building materials, etc.

2. Prepare for site survey

Refer to "3.11.4 Before Site Survey".
a. Check and assign the CS ID number to the PS.
b. Assign a channel number to each CS by setting the DIP switches on the back of the CS.
c. Supply electricity to each CS using an AC adaptor/battery box or by connecting them to the PBX.
d. Install each CS temporarily as planned.
Note
• Install at least 2 m above the floor.
• Place the antennas so that they are pointing in directions that are 90 degrees apart (for antenna
diversity).

3. Conduct the site survey

Refer to "3.11.5 Site Survey".
a. Test the radio signal strength using the PS.
Confirm that the radio signal strength level is "12" near the CS.
Using the KX-TD7685/KX-TD7695

To survey Display example:

specific channel
RADIO STRENGTH RADIO STRENGTH
1 9 0 Channel No. <<< MEASURING >>> CH0 SLOT:06 SYNC
L:12 0000/0100
CS-ID:9005301234
Press 1, 9, and POWER 0 to 4
for more than 2 seconds.

b. By walking away from the CS with the PS, check the radio signal strength. The radio signal strength
weakens as you walk away from the CS.
c. Map the CS coverage area at radio signal strength levels "3" and "8".
d. Make sure that adjacent CS coverage areas meet where the radio signal strength level is "7" to "9".
e. Make sure that the radio signal strength level is greater than "3" at any location within the service area
required by the user.

Installation Manual 223

3.11.2 Procedure Overview

4. Finish the site survey

Refer to "3.11.6 After Site Survey".
a. Turn off the PS.
b. Stop supplying power, and return all DIP switches of each CS to the OFF position.

5. Connect the CS and PS to the PBX and test the operation

Refer to "3.11.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX".
a. Connect the CSs to the PBX.
b. Register the PSs to the PBX.
c. Walk around the service area while having a conversation using a registered PS. If noise is frequent or
conversations disconnect, relocate the CSs or install an additional CS.

6. Mount the CS on the wall

Refer to "3.11.8 Wall Mounting".
a. If there are no problems in testing, mount the CS on the wall.

224 Installation Manual

 3.11.3 Site Planning

3.11.3 Site Planning

Choosing the best site for the CS requires careful planning and testing of essential areas. The best location
may not always be convenient for installation. Read the following information before installing the unit.

Understanding Radio Waves

Characteristics of Radio Waves
The transmission of radio waves and the CS coverage area depend on the structure and materials of the
building.
Office equipment, such as computers and fax machines, can interfere with radio waves. Such equipment may
create noise or interfere with the performance of the PS.
The illustration below shows the special transmitting patterns of radio waves.
1. Radio waves are reflected by objects made of materials such as metal.
2. Radio waves are diffracted by objects such as metallic columns.
3. Radio waves penetrate objects made of materials such as glass.

1. Reflection
CS

Column

2. Diffraction

3. Penetration

Relationships between Radio Waves and Building Structure and Materials

• The CS coverage area is affected more by the building materials and their thickness than the number of
obstacles.
• Radio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted by conductive objects and rarely penetrate them.
• Radio waves tend to penetrate insulated objects and are rarely reflected by them.
• Radio waves penetrate thin objects more than thick objects.
• The table below shows the transmission tendency of radio waves when they reach objects made from
various materials.

Installation Manual 225

3.11.3 Site Planning

Object Material Transmission Tendency

Wall Concrete The thicker they are, the less radio waves
penetrate them.
Ferroconcrete Radio waves can penetrate them, but the more iron
there is, the more radio waves are reflected.
Window Glass Radio waves usually penetrate them.
Glass with wire net Radio waves can penetrate them, but tend to be
reflected.
Glass covered with Radio waves are weakened considerably when
heatresistant film they penetrate windows.
Floor Ferroconcrete Radio waves can penetrate them, but the more iron
there is, the more radio waves are reflected.
Partition Steel Radio waves are reflected and rarely penetrate
them.
Plywood, Glass Radio waves usually penetrate them.
Column Ferroconcrete Radio waves can penetrate them, but the more iron
there is, the more radio waves tend to be reflected
or diffracted.
Metal Radio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted.
Cabinet Steel Radio waves are usually reflected or diffracted, and
rarely penetrate them.
Wood Radio waves can penetrate them, but they are
weakened.

CS Coverage Area
The example below shows the size of the coverage area of 1 CS if it is installed in an area with no obstacles.

226 Installation Manual

 3.11.3 Site Planning

Note
Radio signal strength levels are measured during the site survey (refer to "3.11.5 Site Survey").

A Coverage Area
Radio signal strength level is
greater than "3".
(About 35 m to 50 m)

B
B Good Coverage Area
Radio signal strength
level is greater than "8".
(About 20 m to 30 m)
Good sound quality
can be maintained.
Gray Zone:
Conversation will be
intermittent C Out of Service:
Cannot make/receive calls

Radio Signal Strength Levels

Level: 11 to 12 Better
Level: 08 to 10 Good
Level: 03 to 07 May receive noise
Level: 01 to 02 Receives noise easily or disconnects
Level: 00 Out of range

Site Survey Preparation

1. Obtain a map and investigate the installation site.
a. Check the obstacles (e.g., shelves, columns, and partitions).
b. Check the materials of the structures (e.g., metal, concrete, and plywood).
c. Check the layout and dimensions of the room, corridor, etc.
d. Write down the above information on the map.
2. Examine the service area required by the user on the map, referring to the following example.
a. Draw the coverage area around a CS. Extend the coverage area 20 m to 50 m in each direction,
depending on the materials of the building structures and obstacles in the installation site. Note that a
CS cannot be installed outside a building.
b. If 1 CS cannot cover the entire service area, install additional CSs as required. Overlap the coverage
areas of adjacent CSs.
Where CS coverage areas overlap, the PS will start call handover to the next CS if the signal from one
CS becomes weak. However, if a PS moves away from a CS and there are no CSs available for
handover, the PS may go out of range and the call could be lost.

Installation Manual 227

3.11.3 Site Planning

Example: Installing in a Room Separated by Interior Walls

Things to take note of:
• The room is separated by interior walls.
• The room is surrounded by concrete walls.
CS installation plan:
• The coverage area of each CS will not extend as far as when there are no obstacles, because the radio
signals will be weakened by separating walls. Therefore, you will need 5 CSs to cover the entire room.

100 m

50 m

CS no. 1

CS no. 2

CS no. 5

CS no. 3 CS no. 4

228 Installation Manual

 3.11.4 Before Site Survey

3.11.4 Before Site Survey

Use the KX-TD7685/KX-TD7695 PS to conduct the site survey.

Note
Display prompts for the site survey are only available in English.

Checking the CS ID Number

Check the CS ID number label attached to the CS. If the CS ID number label is not attached to the CS, check
the CS ID number using the Maintenance Console. For details, refer to "2.6.15 Utility—CS Information" in the
PC Programming Manual.

Assigning the CS ID Number to the PS

Using the KX-TD7685/KX-TD7695
To enter letters
A: + 0 C: + ABC 2 E: + GHI 4

B: + 1 D: + DEF 3 F: + JKL 5

1 9 ABC 2 CS No. CS ID No.

Press 1, 9, and POWER 0 to 7 0 to 9 and A to F
for more than 2 seconds.

To the initial display To the Desired CS No.

Note
To clear the CS ID number assigned to the PS, follow the procedure below:

To clear one by one

CS No.
0 to 7
1 9 DEF 3
To the Desired CS No.
Press 1, 9, and POWER
for more than 2 seconds. OR

To clear all at once

To the initial display
#

Setting and Installing the CS Temporarily for Site Survey

1. Switch the Radio Signal Test switch from OFF to ON.
2. Set the channel number switches as desired.
3. Set the Power Supply Select switch as desired.

Installation Manual 229

3.11.4 Before Site Survey

KX-TDA0155

1 2 3 4

Channel 0

1 2 3 4

Channel 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON 1 2 3 4

Channel 2
DIP Switch
1 2 3 4
OFF
Channel 3
Channel Number Switch
Power Supply Select Switch 1 2 3 4
ON: From the AC Adaptor (KX-A11/KX-
Channel 4
TCA1)/Battery Box (PSZZTD142CE)
OFF: From the PBX
Radio Signal Test Switch

230 Installation Manual

 3.11.4 Before Site Survey

KX-TDA0158
ON OFF

Radio Signal Test Switch 6

Power Supply Select Switch 5

ON: From the AC Adaptor (KX-A11)/
Battery Box (PSZZTD142CE)
4
OFF: From the PBX

3
Channel Number Switch
2

DIP Switch

Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4

4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1

Note
If more than 1 CS is in Radio Signal Test mode, each CS must have a unique channel number.
4. After setting the DIP switches, connect the CS to an AC adaptor/battery box using a power supply adaptor,
or connect it to the PBX.

WARNING
The AC adaptor should be connected to a vertically oriented or floor-mounted AC outlet. Do not
connect the AC adaptor to a ceiling-mounted AC outlet, as the weight of the adaptor may cause
it to become disconnected.

Notice
• When using the KX-TDA0158, it is NOT recommended to conduct the site survey using the battery
box.
• If the Power Supply Select switch is set to ON in step 3, connect the CS to an AC adaptor/battery
box. If it is set to OFF, connect the CS to the PBX.

Installation Manual 231

3.11.4 Before Site Survey

KX-TDA0155 KX-TDA0158

RJ11 Modular RJ45 Modular

Telephone Cord Telephone Cord
(PSJA1017Z)
Power Supply Adaptor Power Supply Adaptor
(PSZZ1TDA0142) (PSZZ1TDA0142)
RJ11 Modular RJ11 Modular

To AC Adaptor (KX-A11/KX-TCA1)/ To AC Adaptor (KX-A11)/

Battery Box (PSZZTD142CE) Battery Box (PSZZTD142CE)

RJ11 Modular RJ45 Modular

To PBX To PBX

232 Installation Manual

 3.11.4 Before Site Survey

5. Install the CS temporarily for the site survey. Install the CS at least 2 m above the floor, and place the
antennas so that they are pointing in directions that are 90 degrees apart (for antenna diversity), as follows:

45º
90º

45º

At least 2 m

Installation Manual 233

3.11.5 Site Survey

3.11.5 Site Survey

The PS has a Radio Signal Test mode that monitors the state of the radio link to the CS for site survey. In
Radio Signal Test mode, the frame loss and signal strength of a synchronous slot, and the signal strength of
the other slots can be measured when the PS is monitoring the CS. After installing the CSs temporarily as
planned during site planning, set the PS to Radio Signal Test mode and locate each CS to measure its coverage
area. Then, record the results on the map of the installation site.

Testing the Radio Signal Strength

After locating the CS(s) temporarily, execute the Radio Signal Test using the PS. Directly after entering Radio
Signal Test mode, the PS scans channel 0 for a CS that it can connect to. The channel to be scanned can be
changed by pressing the appropriate keys 0 through 4.

1. Enter Radio Signal Test mode.

Using the KX-TD7685/KX-TD7695

To survey other slots To survey specific channel

1 9 0 / Channel No.
Press 1, 9, and POWER Previous or Next 0 to 4
for more than 2 seconds.

Display example:
To store the scan data
RADIO STRENGTH RADIO STRENGTH
<<< MEASURING >>> CH0*1 SLOT:06*2 SYNC*3 Log No.
L:12*4 0000/0100*5
CS-ID:9005301234
0 to 9

*1 : Channel number
*2 : Slot number
*3 : When a slot is synchronised, "SYNC" is displayed.
*4 : Radio signal strength level (12 to 00)
*5 : Frame error (0000 to 9999)/Frame counter (0000 to 9999). Frame error indicates the number of
errors out of 10 000 radio signal receptions. An increased number of frame errors indicates greater
radio signal interference and more frequent noise during conversation. The ideal number of frame
errors is "0000".
*6 : Error rate (%) = Frame error (0000 to 9999) / Frame counter (0000 to 9999) ´ 100

Note
• Storing the scan data will clear all directory data.
• The PS will not operate in normal mode if scan data is saved on it. For details on clearing scan
data, refer to "Clearing the Stored Scan Data".
2. Measure the radio signal strength by moving towards and away from the CS.
Note
• When the error rate is 2% or more, measure the error rate at the same location at least 5 times.
You must disconnect the CS and then reconnect it to take each measurement. If the error rate is
consistently 2% or more, there may be interference from external wireless equipment. In this case,
the following may happen regardless of the radio signal strength level.

234 Installation Manual

 3.11.5 Site Survey

Error Rate Description

Approx. 2% May receive noise

Approx. 10% May fail to make/receive calls

The above is a rough standard, and may vary depending on the environment.
• When deciding where to install the CS, priority should be given to an error rate rather than a radio
signal strength level.
• After installing the CS according to the results of the survey, confirm that calls can be made and
received, and conversations can be heard clearly.
a. Move to the CS until the radio signal strength level becomes "12".
b. Move away from the CS and identify the CS coverage area within which the radio signal strength level
is greater than "8". Draw the area on the map.
c. Move away from the CS and identify the CS coverage area within which the radio signal strength level
is greater than "3". Draw the area on the map.

PS CH0
L:12
Channel no. 0

PS CH0
L:08
PS CH0
L:03

Radio Signal Strength Levels

Level: 11 to 12 Better
Level: 08 to 10 Good
Level: 03 to 07 May receive noise
Level: 01 to 02 Receives noise easily or disconnects
Level: 00 Out of range

Installation Manual 235

3.11.5 Site Survey

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for other CSs, and relocate the CSs when necessary.
a. Plan adjacent CS coverage areas so that areas meet where radio signal strength level is "7" to "9".

Channel no. 0 Channel no. 1

b. Plan the CS coverage areas to meet for at least 2 CSs at any location in the installation site.

Channel no. 0 Channel no. 1

Channel no. 2 Channel no. 3

c. Make sure that the radio signal strength level is greater than "3" at any location in the service area
required by the user.

Note
• If a channel is set, the results of measurement for the 24 slots on the channel are saved each time.
If the same channel is set, the new results override the previous ones. Therefore, a measurement
of 5 channels ´ 24 slots in total can be made.
• If correct results cannot be obtained (e.g., there are many frame errors), change the location of the
CS and repeat the site survey to select the best location.

236 Installation Manual

 3.11.5 Site Survey

• If multiple CSs cover the same area, the phone connection may become noisy or the number of
possible simultaneous calls with PSs may decrease due to interference between the CSs. As a
guideline, the maximum number of CSs in an area with a radio signal strength of "11" is 4 (for
KX-TDA0155)/2 (for the KX-TDA0158).

Level 11

KX-TDA0155

To guarantee the number of simultaneous calls, the KX-TDA0158 is recommended.

Referring to the Stored Scan Data

Using the KX-TD7685/KX-TD7695

1 9 1 Log No.
Press 1, 9, and POWER 0 to 9
for more than 2 seconds.

To go to other slots To go to specific channel

A a
/ Channel No.
Previous or Next 0 to 4

Clearing the Stored Scan Data

Using the KX-TD7685/KX-TD7695

1 9 GHI 4

Press 1, 9, and POWER

for more than 2 seconds.

Installation Manual 237

3.11.6 After Site Survey

3.11.6 After Site Survey

After obtaining the proper measurement results, exit Radio Signal Test mode before connecting the CS to the
PBX.
1. Hold down the POWER button on the PS until the PS is turned OFF.
2. Disconnect the CS from the AC adaptor/battery box or the PBX to stop supplying electricity.
KX-TDA0155 KX-TDA0158

3. Switch all DIP switches on the CS from ON to OFF.

KX-TDA0155 KX-TDA0158

ON OFF
6
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON 5
4
OFF 3
2
1

238 Installation Manual

 3.11.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

3.11.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Note
When connecting both KX-TDA0155 and KX-TDA0158 CSs to the same card, the KX-TDA0158 CSs must
be connected to lower-numbered pins on the card than the KX-TDA0155 CSs.

Refer to the following examples to connect a CS to the PBX.

KX-TDA0155

DHLC8 Card

Cable Maximum Distance

ø 0.4 mm: 222 m
ø 0.5 mm: 347 m
ø 0.6 mm: 500 m

CS (RJ11)
DHLC/DLC card (Amphenol)
Signal Name Pin No.
D1 1 Signal Name
2 D1
3 D2
D2 4

Accessories and User-supplied Items for the CS

Accessories (included): Screws ´ 2, Washers ´ 2
User-supplied (not included): RJ11 connector

Note
For details about DHLC card or DLC card, refer to "3.6.2 DHLC8 Card (KX-TDA0170)", "3.6.3 DLC8 Card
(KX-TDA0171)", or "3.6.4 DLC16 Card (KX-TDA0172)".

Installation Manual 239

3.11.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

KX-TDA0158

DHLC8 Card

Cable Maximum Distance

ø 0.4 mm: 222 m
ø 0.5 mm: 347 m
ø 0.6 mm: 500 m
CAT 5: 347 m

CS 1 (RJ45) DHLC/DLC card (Amphenol)

Signal Name Pin No. Signal Name
D1C 1
D2C 2
D1B 3
D1A 4 D1B
Master
D2A 5 D2B
D2B 6 D1C
D1D 7 D2C
D2D 8 D1D
D2D
CS 2 (RJ45) D1E
D2E
Signal Name Pin No.
D1F
D1C 1
D2F
D2C 2
D1G
D1B 3
D2G
D1A 4
Master D1H
D2A 5
D2H
D2B 6
D1D 7
D2D 8

Accessories and User-supplied Items for the CS

Accessories (included): Screws ´ 2, Washers ´ 2
User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector

Note
• The no. 3, 4, 5 and 6 pins (Master) of the CS must be connected to 2 pairs of pins on the DHLC/DLC
card.

240 Installation Manual

 3.11.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

• When connecting multiple KX-TDA0158 CSs to a DHLC/DLC card, make sure that the no. 3, 4, 5 and
6 pins (Master) of adjacent CSs are at least 2 pairs of pins away on the card.
• For details about DHLC card or DLC card, refer to "3.6.2 DHLC8 Card (KX-TDA0170)
", "3.6.3 DLC8 Card (KX-TDA0171)", or "3.6.4 DLC16 Card (KX-TDA0172)".
• The Local Processor (LPR) software of the DHLC/DLC card used must be version 5.000 or later. If
necessary, upgrade the LPR software of the DHLC/DLC card. To confirm the LPR software version of
the card, refer to "3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary" in the PC Programming Manual.
• CS connections must be made within the same DHLC/DLC card.
• When a wrong connection is made, satisfactory performance of the CS cannot be guaranteed. Check
the connection of CS and the PBX using the Maintenance Console. For information about how to view
CS information using the Maintenance Console, refer to "2.6.15 Utility—CS Information" in the PC
Programming Manual.

Connecting the CS
1. Connect the cable from the PBX to the CS.
KX-TDA0155 KX-TDA0158

RJ11 Modular RJ45 Modular

To PBX To PBX

2. Pass the cable through the groove of the CS (in any direction depending on your preference).
KX-TDA0155 KX-TDA0158

To PBX To PBX

Installation Manual 241

3.11.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Registering the PS
The PS must be registered to the PBX before it can be used. Programming of both the PS and PBX is required.
A Proprietary Telephone (PT) with multiline display (e.g., KX-T7636 6-line display) is required to perform the
PBX system programming.

Note
For details about system programming using a PT, refer to "2.3.2 PT Programming" in the Feature Guide,
and "2.1 PT Programming" in the PT Programming Manual.

Entering the System Programming Mode

PT (Administrator Level)

System Password for Administrator—

# for PT Programming Programming No.
PROGRAM/
PAUSE
= 1234 3 digits

Note
means default value throughout this section.

Setting the Personal Identification Number (PIN) for PS Registration

To prevent registering the PS to a wrong PBX, a PIN for PS registration can be set to the PBX. Before registering
the PS to the PBX, enter the PIN set to the PBX into the PS. By doing so, the PS will only be registered to the
PBX with the matching PIN.

Note
• By default, the PIN for PS registration is "1234" for both the PBX and PS. Therefore, the PS can be
registered to the PBX without setting the PIN.
• The PIN for PS registration will only be used when registering the PS to the PBX. Therefore, during
normal operation after registration, even if there is more than 1 PBX with the same PIN near the PS,
the PS will not be inadvertently linked to a different PBX.

Setting the PIN for PBX

[692] PIN for PS Registration

4 digits END
ENTER 1234 ENTER (HOLD)

Setting the PIN for PS

242 Installation Manual

 3.11.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

Using the KX-TD7685/KX-TD7695

Press POWER Select Select

for 2 seconds. "Setting Handset". "System Option".

If required
System Lock Password
4 digits
Select
"Change PIN".

PIN for PS Registration

C.Tone
1 to 8 digits
1234

PS Registration

[690] PS No. Extn. No. To the PS

operation
001 to 128 1 to 4 digits below END
ENTER ENTER (HOLD)

When the PS has not been registered yet

When registering the PS for the first time, it is possible to select the desired language for the display. (You do
not need to enter the PS system programming mode when registering for the first time.)

Using the KX-TD7685/KX-TD7695

If required

C.Tone C.Tone
Press Press "F"
POWER for Select the desired for 2
2 seconds. language. seconds.

When the PS has already been registered to another PBX

One PS can be registered to a maximum of 4 different PBXs.

Using the KX-TD7685/KX-TD7695

Press POWER Select Select

for 2 seconds. "Setting Handset". "System Option".

If required
System Lock Password
4 digits Select
"Register H/S".

C.Tone
Select the desired
base (Base 1–4).

Installation Manual 243

3.11.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX

PS Termination
Confirm the following before cancelling the PS registration:
• The PS is turned on.
• The PS is within range.

[691] PS No.
001 to 128
ENTER ENTER

If "Rejected" or "Time out" is displayed

CLEAR YES

END
Press "CLEAR". Press "YES". (HOLD)

If "Rejected" or "Time out" is displayed

The registration information is still stored in the PS. You need to delete the registration information from the
PS.

Using the KX-TD7685/KX-TD7695

Press POWER Select Select

for 2 seconds. "Setting Handset". "System Option".

If required
System Lock Password
4 digits
Select Select the desired
"Cancel Base". base (Base 1–4).

C.Tone
Select "Yes".

Testing the Operation

Walk around the service area while having a conversation using a registered PS. If noise is frequent or
conversations disconnect, relocate the CSs or install an additional CS.

244 Installation Manual

 3.11.8 Wall Mounting

3.11.8 Wall Mounting

Mounting the KX-TDA0155/KX-TDA0158
WARNING
• Make sure that the wall that the unit will be attached to is strong enough to support the unit
(approx. 310 g). If not, it is necessary for the wall to be reinforced.
• Only use the wall-mounting equipment (screws, washers, wall mounting plate) included with
the unit.
• When driving the screws into the wall, be careful to avoid touching any metal laths, wire laths
or metal plates in the wall.
• When this product is no longer in use, make sure to detach it from the wall.

CAUTION
• Do not stretch or bend the cables. Also, do not allow anything to rest on the cables.
• Use cables that are fire-resistant or fireproof.
• The CS and the cables should never be placed near or over a radiator or other heat source.
• Do not bundle cables that are connected to the CS with the AC power cords of machines located
nearby.
• Make sure the cables are securely fastened to the wall.

1. Place the reference for wall mounting on the wall to mark the 2 screw positions.
2. Install the 2 screws and washers (included) into the wall.
Note
• Make sure that the screw heads are at the same distance from the wall.
• Install the screws perpendicular to the wall.
3. Insert the upper and lower tabs of the wall mounting plate into the designated openings in the base unit.
KX-TDA0155 KX-TDA0158

Wall Mounting Plate Wall Mounting Plate

(PSKL1032Y4) (PSKL1032Y4)

Tabs Tabs

Installation Manual 245

3.11.8 Wall Mounting

4. Slide the wall mounting plate in the direction of the arrow until it clicks.
KX-TDA0155 KX-TDA0158

5. Hook the CS on the screw heads.

KX-TDA0155 KX-TDA0158

Washer Washer

Drive the screw Drive the screw

to this point. to this point.

6. Place the antennas so that they are pointing in directions that are 90 degrees apart (for antenna diversity),
as follows:

45º

90º

45º

246 Installation Manual

 3.11.8 Wall Mounting

Reference for Wall Mounting

Please copy this page and use as a reference for wall mounting.

Install a screw here.

83 mm
100 mm

Install a screw here.

Note
Make sure to set the print size to correspond with the size of this page. If the dimension of the paper output
still deviates slightly from the measurement indicated here, use the measurement indicated here.

Installation Manual 247

3.12.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays

3.12 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers,

External Sensors, and External Relays

3.12.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External

Sensors, and External Relays
The PBX supports a maximum of 16 doorphones (KX-T30865/KX-T7765 with a DPH4 card, or German-type
doorphone with a DPH2 card), 16 door openers, 16 external sensors, and 16 external relays.

Note
Doorphones, door openers, external sensors, and external relays are user-supplied.

Maximum Cabling Distance

Cable Maximum Distance

Doorphone
ø 0.4 mm: 70 m
ø 0.5 mm: 113 m
ø 0.6 mm: 180 m
CAT 5: 113 m

Door Opener

External Sensor/
External Relay Device

Installing the Doorphone (KX-T30865/KX-T7765)

Note
The illustrations shown in the installation procedure are based on the KX-T30865.

1. Loosen the screw to separate the doorphone into 2 halves.

ic
ason
Pan

Screw

Note for KX-T7765 Users

248 Installation Manual

 3.12.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays

When loosening/tightening the screw, do not scratch the cabinet wall with the driver shaft.

Cabinet Wall

2. Pass the wires through the hole in the base cover, and attach the base cover to a wall using 2 screws.
Screw

To 8-pin terminal block

Note
Two kinds of screws are included with the doorphone. Please choose the appropriate kind for your wall
type.

: when a doorphone plate has been fixed to the wall

: when you wish to install the doorphone directly onto the wall

3. Connect the wires to the screws located in the back cover.

To 8-pin terminal block

4. Re-attach the 2 halves and re-insert the screw.

Installation Manual 249

3.12.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays

Connection
Use 8-pin and 10-pin terminal blocks (included with the card) for connection.

1. While pressing down on the hole at the top of the terminal block using a screwdriver, insert the wire into
the side hole as shown below. Repeat this procedure for other doorphones, door openers, external sensors,
and external relays.
Refer to "3.7.2 DPH4 Card (KX-TDA0161)", "3.7.3 DPH2 Card (KX-TDA0162)", and "3.7.4 EIO4 Card
(KX-TDA0164)" for pin assignments.

Doorphone

Door Opener

External Sensor/
External Relay Device

2. Attach the terminal blocks to the connectors of the DPH4/DPH2/EIO4 card on the PBX.

To doorphones/
door openers/
external sensors/
external relays

250 Installation Manual

 3.13.1 Connection of Peripherals

3.13 Connection of Peripherals

3.13.1 Connection of Peripherals

Maximum Distance
5m

Cable Maximum Distance

PC ø 0.4 mm: 10 m
ø 0.5 mm: 10 m
ø 0.6 mm: 10 m MNT Port
CAT 5: 10 m

Cable Maximum Distance

BGM
Music on Hold ø 0.4 mm: 10 m
ø 0.5 mm: 10 m
ø 0.6 mm: 10 m
CAT 5: 10 m

Pager:
Amplifier/Speaker

Maximum Distance
2m RS-232C

PC Printer

PC (via MNT Port)

A PC can be connected to the PBX via the MNT port of the IPCMPR card. It is used for system programming,
diagnostics and external system database storage (save/load) functions.

Pin Assignments
No. Signal Name Input (I)/Output (O) Function

1 TPO+ O Transmit data+

8
2 TPO- O Transmit data-
1 3 TPI+ I Receive data+
4-5 Reserved – –
6 TPI- I Receive data-
7-8 Reserved – –

Installation Manual 251

3.13.1 Connection of Peripherals

BGM/MOH
The PBX provides Background Music and Music on Hold. Up to 2 external music sources (e.g., user-supplied
radios) can be connected to the PBX.

CAUTION
• Wiring should be done carefully to prevent undue force being exerted on the plug. Otherwise, sound
may only be heard intermittently.
• External Music Jacks are SELV ports and should only be connected to approved SELV devices, or in
Australia, via the Line Isolation Unit with the Telecommunications Compliance Label.

Note
When the PBX and external music sources are not connected to the same earth, hum noise may be induced
into Background Music and Music on Hold.

Pager
Up to 2 paging devices (user-supplied) can be connected to the PBX.

CAUTION
External Paging Jacks are SELV ports and should only be connected to approved SELV devices, or in
Australia, via the Line Isolation Unit with the Telecommunications Compliance Label.

PC/Printer (via RS-232C)

The PBX is equipped with an RS-232C interface. This interface provides communication between the PBX
and the user-supplied devices such as PC or line printers. The RS-232C port is used for system programming,
SMDR, diagnostics and external system database storage (save/load) functions.

CAUTION
To protect the system, keep the following in mind:
1. Make sure that both connector cases (frame ground) of the RS-232C cross cable (shielded cable) are
conductive. If they are not conductive, make sure that both connector cases of the cable are firmly
connected.
2. If this is not possible, connect the frame of the PBX to the frame of the PC/Printer using an earthing
wire in order to prevent difference in the electrical potentials.

Pin Assignments
Circuit Type
No. Signal Name Function
EIA CCITT
6 1 2 RD (RXD) Receive Data BB 104
3 SD (TXD) Transmit Data BA 103
4 ER (DTR) Data Terminal Ready CD 108.2
9 5
5 SG Signal Ground AB 102
6 DR (DSR) Data Set Ready CC 107
7 RS (RTS) Request To Send CA 105
8 CS (CTS) Clear To Send CB 106

252 Installation Manual

 3.13.1 Connection of Peripherals

Connection Charts
For connecting a printer/PC with a 9-pin RS-232C connector
PBX (9-pin) Printer/PC (9-pin)
Circuit Type Signal Signal Circuit Type
Pin No. Pin No.
(EIA) Name Name (EIA)
BB RD (RXD) 2 2 RD (RXD) BB
BA SD (TXD) 3 3 SD (TXD) BA
CD ER (DTR) 4 4 ER (DTR) CD
AB SG 5 5 SG AB
CC DR (DSR) 6 6 DR (DSR) CC
CA RS (RTS) 7 7 RS (RTS) CA
CB CS (CTS) 8 8 CS (CTS) CB

For connecting a printer/PC with a 25-pin RS-232C connector

PBX (9-pin) Printer/PC (25-pin)
Circuit Type Signal Signal Circuit Type
Pin No. Pin No.
(EIA) Name Name (EIA)
BB RD (RXD) 2 1 FG AA
BA SD (TXD) 3 3 RD (RXD) BB
CD ER (DTR) 4 2 SD (TXD) BA
AB SG 5 20 ER (DTR) CD
CC DR (DSR) 6 7 SG AB
CA RS (RTS) 7 5 CS (CTS) CB
CB CS (CTS) 8 6 DR (DSR) CC
4 RS (RTS) CF

RS-232C Signals
• Receive Data (RXD):…(input)
Conveys signals from the printer or the PC.
• Transmit Data (TXD):…(output)
Conveys signals from the unit to the printer or the PC. A "Mark" condition is held unless data or BREAK
signals are being transmitted.
• Data Terminal Ready (DTR):…(output)
This signal line is turned ON by the unit to indicate that it is ON LINE. Circuit ER (DTR) ON does not indicate
that communication has been established with the printer or the PC. It is switched OFF when the unit is
OFF LINE.
• Signal Ground (SG)
Connects to the DC ground of the unit for all interface signals.
• Data Set Ready (DSR):…(input)
An ON condition of circuit DR (DSR) indicates the printer or the PC is ready. Circuit DR (DSR) ON does
not indicate that communication has been established with the printer or the PC.
• Request To Send (RTS):…(output)
This lead is held ON whenever DR (DSR) is ON.

Installation Manual 253

3.13.1 Connection of Peripherals

• Clear To Send (CTS):…(input)

An ON condition of circuit CS (CTS) indicates that the printer or the PC is ready to receive data from the
unit. The unit does not attempt to transfer data or receive data when circuit CS (CTS) is OFF.
• Frame Ground (FG)
Connects to the unit frame and the earth ground conductor of the AC power cord.

254 Installation Manual

 3.14.1 LAN Connection

3.14 LAN Connection

3.14.1 LAN Connection

Connection Chart for LAN Connection
The PBX is equipped with a LAN port for connecting to a LAN so that IP telephones (IP-PTs, IP softphones,
SIP Extensions), PCs and a CTI Server can be connected on a private IP network.

IP Softphone

PC
LAN Port

CTI Server Switching Hub

IP-PT
SIP Extension

Switching Hub PBX (LAN Port)

Signal Name Pin No. Pin No. Signal Name
TX+ 1 1 RX+
TX- 2 2 RX-
RX+ 3 3 TX+
RX- 6 6 TX-

Note
• Use an Ethernet straight cable with an RJ45 connector for connection to a switching hub. The cable
should be a 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX CAT 5 or higher cable.
• Make sure that all the CAT 5 cables in use are not over 100 m in length.
• Make sure to create a spanning tree for LAN connection in order to prevent loops from occurring in a
multi-bridged environment. Otherwise, some packets may circulate for long periods of time and
eventually PBX performance system may degrade.
• The CTI server can be used for connecting PCs on a LAN to provide third party call control CTI.
CTI connection uses the CSTA Phase 3 or TAPI 2.1 protocol. The operating system of the PC or CTI
server required for third party call control depends on your CTI application software. For details, refer
to the manual for your CTI application software.

Installation Manual 255

3.15.1 Power Failure Connections

3.15 Power Failure Connections

3.15.1 Power Failure Connections

When the power supply to the PBX fails, power failure transfer (PFT) will switch from the current connection
to the Power Failure Connection. Refer to "2.4.1 Power Failure Transfer" in the Feature Guide for further
information.

Note
While DC power is provided by the backup batteries, the PBX will remain fully operational and the
connection will not switch to the Power Failure Connection.

Using Analogue Trunk Card and Extension Card

Power Failure Connection connects a specific SLT and a trunk in the event of power failure. The following
analogue trunk and extension cards can be used for Power Failure Connections:
• Analogue trunk cards: LCOT16 (4 PFT ports), LCOT8 (2 PFT ports), and LCOT4 (2 PFT ports)
• Extension cards: MSLC16 (4 PFT ports), CSLC16 (4 PFT ports), SLC16 (4 PFT ports), DHLC8 (2 PFT
ports) and SLC8 (2 PFT ports)
To 1 analogue trunk card, connect only 1 extension card.

Note
By programming the PBX, a trunk conversation established during power failure can be maintained even
when the power returns and the connection is switched back to the normal configuration from the Power
Failure Connection. However, if no special programming is performed, the connection will be dropped when
power returns.

RJ11

R2 T2
R1 T1
T1 R1
T2 R2

Extension Card
Trunk Card (e.g., SLC8)
(e.g., LCOT8)

To trunk To SLT

Accessories and User-supplied Items

Accessories (included): none
User-supplied (not included): RJ11 connectors

256 Installation Manual

 3.15.1 Power Failure Connections

RJ11 Connector Pin Assignments for Analogue Trunk Card

PFT Ports 1 and 2

No. Signal Name Function

1 R2 Ring port 2
1
4 2 R1 Ring port 1
3 T1 Tip port 1
4 T2 Tip port 2

PFT Ports 3 and 4 (for LCOT16 card only)

No. Signal Name Function

1 R4 Ring port 4
1
4 2 R3 Ring port 3
3 T3 Tip port 3
4 T4 Tip port 4

RJ11 Connector Pin Assignments for Extension Card

PFT Ports 1 and 2

No. Signal Name Function

1 T2 Tip port 2
1
4 2 T1 Tip port 1
3 R1 Ring port 1
4 R2 Ring port 2

PFT Ports 3 and 4 (for MSLC16/CSLC16/SLC16 card only)

No. Signal Name Function

1 T4 Tip port 4
1
4 2 T3 Tip port 3
3 R3 Ring port 3
4 R4 Ring port 4

Installation Manual 257

3.15.1 Power Failure Connections

Using BRI Card

LINE 1 and LINE 2 of the BRI4 and BRI8 cards can be used for Power Failure Connections.

Note
When the power returns, the connection will switch back to normal configuration from the Power Failure
Connection, and a trunk conversation established during power failure will be dropped.

RJ45
(LINE 2)
Set all DIP switches
To ISDN extension at "ON" positions.
To NT1
RJ45 OFF OFF

(LINE 1)
ON ON

Accessories and User-supplied Items

Accessories (included): none
User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connectors

Switch Settings
Switch Type Usage and Status Definition

PFT Setting DIP Set all DIP switches to "ON" positions to use LINE 1 and LINE 2 as a PFT
port.
LINE 1: Power Failure LINE (NT1)
LINE 2: Power Failure EXTN (extension)

RJ45 Connector LINE 1 Pin Assignments

No. Signal Name Level [V] Function

1-2 Reserved – –
8
3 TX1 (+) Transmit data 1
1 4 RX2 (+) Receive data 2
5 RX1 (-) Receive data 1
6 TX2 (-) Transmit data 2
7-8 Reserved – –

258 Installation Manual

 3.15.1 Power Failure Connections

RJ45 Connector LINE 2 Pin Assignments

No. Signal Name Level [V] Function

1-2 Reserved – –
8
3 RX2 (+) Receive data 2
1 4 TX1 (+) Transmit data 1
5 TX2 (-) Transmit data 2
6 RX1 (-) Receive data 1
7-8 Reserved – –

Installation Manual 259

3.16.1 Starting the PBX

3.16 Starting the PBX

3.16.1 Starting the PBX

CAUTION
• The SD Memory Card must be inserted in the SD Memory Card slot of the IPCMPR card before startup.
• Before touching the System Initialise Switch, discharge static electricity by touching ground or wearing
an earthing strap.
• Once you have started the PBX and if you unplug the PBX, do not perform the following procedures
to start the PBX again. Otherwise, your programmed data is cleared. To restart the PBX, refer
to "5.1.4 Using the Reset Button".
• The PBX will continue to be powered even if the power switch is turned "OFF".
• The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device. Ensure that the AC outlet is located
near the equipment and is easily accessible.

System Initialisation Procedure

1. Slide the System Initialise Switch to the "SYSTEM INITIALIZE" position.
RUN Indicator

Reset Button

RESET
SYSTEM
INITIALIZE

NORMAL

System Initialise Switch

260 Installation Manual

 3.16.1 Starting the PBX

2. Plug the AC power cord into the PBX and an AC outlet, and turn on the PBX. The RUN indicator will flash.
Note
For safety reasons, do not stretch, bend, or pinch the AC power cord.

To AC Outlet

3. While the RUN indicator is flashing, slide the System Initialise Switch back to the "NORMAL" position.
Depending on the configuration, initialisation takes about 1 min to 3 min. If successfully executed, the
RUN indicator will stop flashing and stay lit.
All data will be cleared, and the PBX as well as all optional service cards (except for the IP-GW card) will be
initialised to the default values. The DPTs should show the time as 01:00.
The data of the IP-GW card will not be initialised.

Note
Use only the AC power cord included with the PBX for the PSU.

LED Indications
Indication Colour Description

RUN Green PBX status indication

• OFF: Power Off (includes normal reset)
• ON: Power On and running (on-line)
• Flashing (60 times per minute): Starting up
• Flashing (120 times per minute): Starting up or resetting with:
• the System Initialise Switch in "SYSTEM INITIALIZE" position
• the SD Memory Card not inserted
ALARM Red Alarm indication
• OFF: Normal
• ON: Alarm (CPU stop, alarm for each optional service card)
• Flashing: Alarm (IPCMPR file error in restarting)

Confirming the Trunk Connection

After initialisation, programme the PBX and connect trunks to the PBX.

To confirm that the trunks are successfully connected, dial [ ] [3] [7] + trunk number (3 digits) on a PT, or
press the PT’s S-CO button. You will hear a dial tone if the trunk is available and connected.

Installation Manual 261

3.16.1 Starting the PBX

262 Installation Manual

 Section 4
Guide for the Maintenance Console

Explains the installation procedure, structure, and basic

information of the Maintenance Console.

Installation Manual 263

4.1.1 Overview

4.1 Overview

4.1.1 Overview
The Maintenance Console is designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the PBX. To
programme and administer the PBX by PC, you need to install the Maintenance Console onto the PC.
This section describes overview and installation of the Maintenance Console only.
Menu Bar

System Menu

Note
The contents and design of the software are subject to change without notice.

264 Installation Manual

 4.2.1 PC Connection

4.2 PC Connection

4.2.1 PC Connection
Connection via MNT Port of IPCMPR Card
MNT Port

To LAN Port

Notice
When connecting a PC to the PBX, a fixed IP address must be assigned to the PC. For information about
fixed IP addresses, ask your network administrator.

Note
For pin assignments and maximum cabling distance, refer to "3.13.1 Connection of Peripherals".

Serial Interface Connection

To COM Port

PC

RS-232C Port

CAUTION
To protect the system, keep the following in mind:

Installation Manual 265

4.2.1 PC Connection

1. Make sure that both connector cases (frame ground) of the RS-232C cross cable (shielded cable) are
conductive. If they are not conductive, make sure that both connector cases of the cable are firmly
connected.
2. If this is not possible, connect the frame of the PBX to the frame of the PC using an earthing wire in
order to prevent difference in the electrical potentials.

Note
For pin assignments and maximum cabling distance, refer to "3.13.1 Connection of Peripherals".

External Modem Connection

Modem
To RS-232C port (25-pin)

To trunk/PBX extension port assigned

as the trunk destination RS-232C Port
(9-pin)

External Modem (25-pin) PBX (9-pin)

Signal Name Pin No. Pin No. Signal Name
RD (RXD) 3 2 RD (RXD)
SD (TXD) 2 3 SD (TXD)
ER (DTR) 20 4 ER (DTR)
DR (DSR) 6 6 DR (DSR)

CAUTION
To protect the system, keep the following in mind:
1. Make sure that both connector cases (frame ground) of the RS-232C straight cable (shielded cable)
are conductive. If they are not conductive, make sure that both connector cases of the cable are firmly
connected.
2. If this is not possible, connect the frame of the PBX to the frame of the external modem using an earthing
wire in order to prevent difference in the electrical potentials.

After connecting the PBX and the external modem, set the power switch of the external modem to "ON", then
the external modem will be initialised with the default values.
The following AT command settings may be required for the modem:
• The Data Terminal Ready (DTR) signal should be ignored.
• The Data Terminal Equipment (DTE)/Modem flow control should be turned off.
• Data compression should be disabled.
• Error Correction is not necessary.

266 Installation Manual

 4.2.1 PC Connection

Note
• An AT command (for initialisation, enabling automatic answer, etc.) can only be programmed by
Maintenance Console. "AT&F" is stored as the default value.
• For more information about the AT command, refer to the external modem’s instructions.

Installation Manual 267

4.3.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console

4.3 Installation of the Maintenance Console

4.3.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console

System Requirements
Required Operating System
• Microsoft® Windows® XP or Windows Vista® Business
Minimum Hardware Requirements
• HDD: 100 MB of available hard disk space
Recommended Display Settings
• Screen resolution: XGA (1024 ´ 768)
• DPI setting: Normal size (96 DPI)

Password Security
CAUTION
To the Administrator or Installer regarding the system password
1. Please provide all system passwords to the customer.
2. To avoid unauthorised access and possible abuse of the PBX, keep the passwords secret, and inform
the customer of the importance of the passwords, and the possible dangers if they become known to
others.
3. The PBX has default passwords preset. For security, change these passwords the first time that you
programme the PBX.
4. Change the passwords periodically.
5. It is strongly recommended that passwords of 10 numbers or characters be used for maximum
protection against unauthorised access. For a list of numbers and characters that can be used in system
passwords, refer to "1.1.2 Entering Characters" in the PC Programming Manual.

Installing the Maintenance Console

Note
• Make sure to install and use the latest version of the Maintenance Console.
• To install or uninstall the software on a PC running Windows XP Professional, you must be logged in
as a user in either the "Administrators" or "Power Users" group.
• To install or uninstall the software on a PC running Windows Vista Business, you must be logged in
as a user in the "Administrators" group.
1. Copy the setup file of the Maintenance Console to your PC.
2. Double-click the setup file to run the installer.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions provided by the installation wizard.

Starting the Maintenance Console and Assigning the Basic Items (Quick
Setup)
When you start the Maintenance Console with the Installer Level Programmer Code and connect to the PBX
for the first time after initialisation (with the factory default setting), Quick Setup will launch automatically. During

268 Installation Manual

 4.3.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console

Quick Setup, you will set up the basic items. For details about the basic items, refer to "2.3.4 Quick Setup" in
the Feature Guide.
1. Connect the PC to the PBX with an Ethernet straight cable or RS-232C cross cable.
2. Start the Maintenance Console from the Start menu.
3. "Information before programming" appears.
a. Carefully read this important additional information, which includes updates to this and other
manuals.
b. Click OK to close this window.
4. a. Enter the Installer Level Programmer Code (default: INSTALLER).
The Programmer Code authorises different programming levels, and the Quick Setup is only
available when you start the Maintenance Console with the Installer Level Programmer Code.

Note
There are 2 other Programmer Codes with limited authorisation: Administrator Level (default:
ADMIN), and User Level (default: USER).
b. Click OK.
5. Click Connect.
6. a. Select KX-TDE100/200 from PBX Model.
b. Select the LAN or RS-232C tab, depending on the type of PC connection with the PBX.
c. Specify the settings as required.
Note
When connecting to the PBX for the first time selecting LAN, the IP Address and Port
Number must be set to 192.168.0.101 and 35300 respectively.
d. Enter the system password for installer (default: 1234).
e. Click Connect.
7. When country/area data do not match:
a. Click OK to replace the country/area data of the PBX. Replacement may take several minutes to
complete.
b. Follow the procedure described in "3.16.1 Starting the PBX" and restart the PBX.
c. Repeat step 5 to reconnect the Maintenance Console to the PBX.
8. Follow the instructions of the Quick Setup wizard and assign the basic items (Quick Setup).
The system menu appears. You may now begin programming the PBX.

Notice
1. During a long programming session, it is highly recommended that you periodically save the system
data to the SD Memory Card. If the PBX undergoes a sudden power failure or if the system is reset for
some reason, all the system data in RAM will be lost. However, if system data has been saved to the
SD Memory Card, it can be easily restored.
To save the system data to the SD Memory Card, (1) click the "SD Memory Backup" icon before
resetting the PBX or turning off the power, or (2) exit the Maintenance Console so that the PBX
automatically saves the system data.
2. The PC will not perform any shutdown operation, or enter the power-saving system standby mode
while the Maintenance Console is connected to the PBX. To perform either of the operations above,
first close the connection to the PBX.

CAUTION
Do not remove the SD Memory Card while power is supplied to the PBX. Doing so may cause the PBX to
fail to start when you try to restart the system.

Installation Manual 269

4.3.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console

270 Installation Manual

 Section 5
Troubleshooting

This section provides information on the PBX and

telephone troubleshooting.

Installation Manual 271

5.1.1 Installation

5.1 Troubleshooting

5.1.1 Installation
PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION

You cannot make/receive • IP-EXT/IP-GW/DSP • Replace the corresponding card.

calls via an IP network. card malfunction
• IPCMPR card • Replace the IPCMPR card (be sure to turn
malfunction off the PBX when replacing).
• Not enough activation • Purchase additional activation key codes.
keys Please consult a certified dealer for details.
• Poor connection • Make sure that an 8-pin twisted pair cable
is used for connection.
• Make sure that none of the CAT 5 cables in
use are over 100 m in length.
• Make sure that a straight cable is used for
connection to a switching hub.
• Network malfunction • Make sure that all network devices in use
are switched on.
• Make sure that there is no unwanted
firewall in the IP network.
IP-PTs/SIP Extensions do • IP-EXT/DSP card • Replace the corresponding card.
not operate. malfunction
• IPCMPR card • Replace the IPCMPR card (be sure to turn
malfunction off the PBX when replacing).
• Not enough activation • Purchase additional activation key codes.
keys Please consult a certified dealer for details.
• IP-PT/SIP Extension not • Register the corresponding IP-PT/SIP
registered Extension.
• IP-PT/SIP Extension • Replace the IP-PT/SIP Extension.
malfunction
• Poor connection • Make sure that an 8-pin twisted pair cable
is used for connection.
• Make sure that none of the CAT 5 cables in
use are over 100 m in length.
• Make sure that a straight cable is used for
connection to a switching hub.
• Network malfunction • Make sure that all network devices in use
are switched on.
• Make sure that the IP-PT/SIP Extension is
not blocked by the firewall or other network
devices.

272 Installation Manual

 5.1.1 Installation

PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION

Extensions (except IP-PT/ • Extension card • Replace the corresponding card.

SIP Extension) do not malfunction
operate.
• Poor connection • Take the extension and plug it into the
between the PBX and same extension port using a short
the extension telephone cord. If the extension works,
then the connection between the PBX and
the extension must be repaired.
• A telephone with an • Make sure that a 2-wire cord is used.
A-A1 relay is connected. • Make sure that the A-A1 relay switch of the
telephone is in "OUT" or "OFF" position.
• Extension malfunction • Take the extension and plug it into another
extension port that is working. If the
extension does not work, replace the
extension.
• Wrong type of PSU • Replace the PSU with the appropriate type.
The PBX does not operate • Press the Reset Button (refer
properly. to "5.1.4 Using the Reset Button").
• Turn off the power switch, and then turn it
back on.
• Turn off the power switch, and then unplug
the PBX. After 5 minutes, plug the PBX
back in, and turn the power switch back on.
Noise on external paging. • Induced noise on the • Use a shielded cable as the connection
wire between the PBX wire between the PBX and amplifier. A
and the amplifier. short shielded cable is recommended.
Distorted external music. • Excessive input level • Decrease the output level of the external
from external music music source by using the volume control
source. on the music source.
Alternate Calling—Ring/ • Voice-calling mode and • Switch the calling mode to ring-calling.
Voice and Live Call Hands-free mode with • Set the LCS mode to "Private".
Screening (LCS) do not LCS are not available
function as set when using a with Wireless Phones.
Wireless Phone (KX-T7880/
KX-T7885/KX-TD7894/
KX-TD7895).
The ALARM indicator on the • A major system error • See the error log using the Maintenance
front of the shelf turns on red. occurs in the PBX. Console (refer to "5.1.5 Troubleshooting
by Error Log").

Installation Manual 273

5.1.1 Installation

PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION

The LINK indicator of the • IP-EXT/IP-GW card • Replace the corresponding card.
IP-EXT/IP-GW/IPCMPR malfunction
does not turn on.
• IPCMPR card • Replace the IPCMPR card (be sure to turn
malfunction off the PBX when replacing).
• Poor connection. • Make sure that an 8-pin twisted pair cable
is used for connection.
• Make sure that none of the CAT 5 cables in
use are over 100 m in length.
• Make sure that a straight cable is used for
connection to a switching hub.
• Network malfunction • Make sure that all network devices in use
are switched on.

274 Installation Manual

 5.1.2 Connection

5.1.2 Connection
Connection between the PBX and a PT:

CAUSE SOLUTION
Can you dial No
The T/R is connected to the D1/D2. Use the correct cord (the
an extension?
inner 2 wires are for T/R and
D1 D1 the outer 2 wires are for
T T D1/D2)
R R
D2 D2

PBX Extension

Connection between the PBX and an SLT:

CAUSE SOLUTION
The T/R is connected to the D1/D2. Use the correct cord (the
inner 2 wires are for T/R).
D1 If a telephone equipped
T T with an A-A1 relay is
R R connected to the PBX, set
D2
the A-A1 relay switch of the
PBX Extension telephone to "OFF".

Yes
Connection between the PBX and an SLT that is polarity-sensitive:

CAUSE SOLUTION
The "T" is connected to the "R". Reverse the connections of
the T/R.
D1
T T
R R
D2

PBX Extension

(Continued on the next page.)

Installation Manual 275

5.1.2 Connection

Connection between the trunk and the PBX:

CAUSE SOLUTION
(Continued from the Trunk is connected to the T2/T1. Reconnect the trunk to
previous page.) the T1/R1 or T2/R2 of the
T2 telephone jack using 2-
R1 conductor wiring.
T1
Can you dial No
R2
out on a
Trunk PBX
trunk?

Trunk is connected to the T2/R1.

T2
R1
T1
R2
Trunk PBX

276 Installation Manual

 5.1.3 Operation

5.1.3 Operation
PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION

• Cannot set the IP • An unusable value is • Set an IP address within the valid range. IP
address, subnet mask being set. address of the IP-PT/PBX: "1.0.0.0" to
address, and PBX IP "223.255.255.255" Subnet mask address:
address to the IP-PT. "0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255" (except
0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255)
• Cannot register the • The necessary network • When not using a DHCP server, set the IP
IP-PT. parameters are not set to address, subnet mask address, and enter
the IP-PT. the PBX IP address. If necessary, also
enter the IP address of the default gateway.
• When using a DHCP server, enter the PBX
IP address.
• The IP-PT cannot • The wrong IP address, • Check each parameter and enter the
connect to the PBX. subnet mask address, correct value.
PBX IP address, or
default gateway address
was entered.
• The Ethernet cable is not • Check the Ethernet cable connections.
connected correctly.
• The DHCP server is not • Restart the DHCP server.
active. • Disable DHCP and re-enter settings as
appropriate.
• Whenever you try to • The status of the port that • Change the port status from Out of Service
make calls using a SIP the SIP Extension is to In Service using the Maintenance
Extension, a busy tone is connected to is Out of Console.
heard. Service.
• When using the • The HANDSET/ • When the headset is not used, set the
speakerphone on an HEADSET selector is set HANDSET/HEADSET selector to the
APT, nothing is audible. to the "HEADSET" "HANDSET" position.
position.
• When using the • The "HEADSET" mode is • When the headset is not used, select the
speakerphone/monitor selected by Personal "HANDSET" mode by Personal
mode with a DPT, Programming, "Handset/ Programming.
nothing is audible. Headset Selection".
• The PT does not ring. • The ringer volume is off. • Turn on the ringer volume.
• During a power failure, • A DPT or APT is • Disconnect the DPT or APT and connect an
extensions connected to connected to the SLT.
ports 1 to 4 of MSLC16/ extension port. • Set the Tone/Pulse switch to the other
CSLC16/SLC16 and • The dialling mode (tone position.
ports 1 to 2 of DHLC8/ or pulse) is incorrect.
SLC8 cards do not
operate.

Installation Manual 277

5.1.3 Operation

PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION

• Originating an outside • The corresponding • Programme the flexible button. Refer

call, call transfer, or flexible button does not to "1.20.2 Flexible Buttons" in the Feature
conference cannot be exist on the PT. Guide.
performed.
• The LED of the CS does • CS is not connected • Make sure that the cable is connected
not change to Green ON. properly. properly with correct pin assignments. Also,
make sure that the cable does not make
short circuits.
• CS is not set for normal • Switch all DIP switches off.
operation.
• The status of the port that • Change the port status from Out of Service
the CS is connected to is to In Service using the Maintenance
Out of Service. Console.
<KX-TDA0158 only>
• The Local Processor • Upgrade the LPR software of the DHLC/
(LPR) software of the DLC card.
corresponding DHLC/
DLC card is not version
5.000 or later.
<KX-TDA0158 only>
• Both KX-TDA0158 and • Connect the KX-TDA0158 CSs to
KX-TDA0155 CSs are lower-numbered pins on the card than the
connected to the same KX-TDA0155 CSs.
card, and the • Connect the KX-TDA0158 and
KX-TDA0158 CSs are KX-TDA0155 CSs to different cards.
connected to
higher-numbered pins on
the card than the
KX-TDA0155 CSs.
• The LED of the CS stays • CS malfunction • Replace the CS.
Red ON during normal
operation.
• "CLEAR SCAN DATA" is • The PS cannot be used • Clear the scan data (refer to "3.9.5 Site
displayed on the PS’s for normal operation Survey Using the KX-TCA255/
screen after turning on when scan data is stored KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355/
the PS. on the PS. KX-TD7590" or "3.11.5 Site Survey").
• Cannot register the PS. • Wrong Personal • Enter the PIN set to the PBX into the PS.
Identification Number
(PIN) is registered to the
PS.
• PS becomes out of • CSIF card is not working. • Install the CSIF card properly.
range.

278 Installation Manual

 5.1.3 Operation

PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION

• Cannot make calls using • CS is not working. • Make sure that the cable is connected
the PS. properly with correct pin assignments. Also,
make sure that the cable does not make
short circuits.
• Switch all DIP switches off.
• Location of CS is not • Locate the CS properly (refer to "3.9.5 Site
good. Survey Using the KX-TCA255/
KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355/
KX-TD7590", "3.10.5 Site Survey",
or "3.11.5 Site Survey").
• Access system of the PS • Change the access system setting of the
is not properly set. PS to the appropriate system or automatic.
• Noise is frequent while • Call handover is not • Locate the CS properly (refer to "3.9.5 Site
using the PS. working. Survey Using the KX-TCA255/
• Conversations • PS is out of CS coverage KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355/
disconnect while using area. KX-TD7590", "3.10.5 Site Survey",
the PS. or "3.11.5 Site Survey").
• "NO SERVICE" is
displayed on the PS’s
screen.
• The CS is not busy (i.e., • There is noise during a • Reduce the number of CSs in the area, or
the status of the LED is phone call. increase the distance between CSs (refer
not Moderate Green to "3.9.5 Site Survey Using the
Flashing), but calls KX-TCA255/KX-TCA256/KX-TCA355/
cannot be made or KX-TD7590", "3.10.5 Site Survey",
received. or "3.11.5 Site Survey").
• There is noise during a
phone call.
• PS stays out of service • It may take about 20 s for • Wait until the CS starts up.
when the CS status is CS to start up after the
changed from Out of status has been changed
Service to In Service. to In Service.
• The maximum number of • Poor connection • Make sure that a 4-pair cable is used for
PS calls that a connection.
high-density CS
supports cannot be
made.

Installation Manual 279

5.1.4 Using the Reset Button

5.1.4 Using the Reset Button

If the PBX does not operate properly, use the Reset Button. Before using the Reset Button, try the system
feature again to confirm whether there definitely is a problem or not.

CAUTION
In order to avoid possible corruption of data on the SD Memory Card, please ensure that the "SD
ACCESS" LED is off before pressing the Reset Button.

Note
• When the System Initialise Switch is set to "NORMAL", pressing the Reset Button causes the following:
– Camp-on is cleared.
– Calls on hold are terminated.
– Calls on exclusive hold are terminated.
– Calls in progress are terminated.
– Call park is cleared.
Other data stored in memory, except the above, are not cleared.
• Be aware that pressing the Reset Button with the System Initialise Switch in the "SYSTEM
INITIALIZE" position clears all data stored in the PBX. Do not perform this operation unless you intend
to delete all data from the PBX.

Operation
If the PBX does not operate properly:
1. Slide the System Initialise Switch to the "NORMAL" position.
2. Press the Reset Button for about 1 second.
RUN Indicator

LED
Reset Button

System Initialise Switch

280 Installation Manual

 5.1.5 Troubleshooting by Error Log

5.1.5 Troubleshooting by Error Log

When a major system error occurs in the PBX, the ALARM indicator on the front of the shelf turns on red, and
the system logs the error information.

Error Log Display Format

Below is the display format of the error log. For information about how to view the error log using the
Maintenance Console, refer to "2.6.8 Utility—Error Log" in the PC Programming Manual.

Example: Maintenance Console

3 7

1 2 4 5 6

Example: Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

04/01/01 10:37AM MJ ALM #000 10000 MPR WDT overflow
04/01/01 11:07AM MN ALM #010 10000 AC power down
04/01/01 03:55PM MN ALM #301 10501 Digital trunk RAI reception

1 2 3 4 5 6

Description
Item Description

1 Date The date of the error detection.

2 Time The time of the error detection.
3 Level Minor (MN ALM) Displays minor errors, which affect only a certain part of system
operation.
Major (MJ ALM) Displays major errors, which affect operation of the whole
system, or result in system failure.
4 Error Code The 3-digit error code assigned by the PBX.

Installation Manual 281

5.1.5 Troubleshooting by Error Log

Item Description

5 Sub Code The 6-digit sub code of the relevant hardware (X1YYZZ).
• X: Shelf type
– Physical shelf: " " (blank)
– Virtual shelf: "*" (asterisk)
• 1: Shelf number
• YY: Slot number
– KX-TDE100 (Physical slot): 00 to 06
(00: IPCMPR Card Slot; 01 to 06: Free Slots)
– KX-TDE200 (Physical slot): 00 to 11
(00: IPCMPR Card Slot; 01 to 11: Free Slots)
– KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 (Virtual slot): 01 to 08
(01 to 04: Virtual Trunk Slots; 05 to 08: Virtual Extension
Slots)
• ZZ: Port number
– For optional service cards except OPB3 card:
Port number (01 to 16) will be displayed.
– For OPB3 card:
Sub slot number (1 to 3) + port number (1 to 4) will be
displayed as follows:
• Sub slot 1 of OPB3: 11 to 14
• Sub slot 2 of OPB3: 21 to 24
• Sub slot 3 of OPB3: 31 to 34
Note
When there is no parameter for slot and port number, YY and
ZZ will be displayed as "00".
Example: Sub code for IPCMPR card = " 10000"
6 Error Message A description of the error.
7 Log Information Displays probable causes of the errors and their solutions.

282 Installation Manual

Section 6
Appendix

Installation Manual 283

6.1.1 PMMPR Software File Version 2.0xxx

6.1 Revision History

6.1.1 PMMPR Software File Version 2.0xxx

New Options
• System Components Table
• KX-TDA0177 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card with Caller ID (CSLC16)
• KX-TDA0192 2-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card (ESVM2)
• KX-TDA0194 4-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card (ESVM4)
• KX-TDA0155 DECT 6.0 2-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a DHLC/DLC Card (PT-interface
CS) for DECT 6.0 Portable Station
• KX-TDA0158 DECT 6.0 8-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a DHLC/DLC Card (PT-interface
CS) for DECT 6.0 Portable Station
• KX-T7765 Doorphone

New Contents
• 3.11 Connection of DECT 6.0 Portable Stations

284 Installation Manual

 6.1.2 PMMPR Software File Version 2.01xx

6.1.2 PMMPR Software File Version 2.01xx

New Options
• System Components Table
• KX-NCS4501 1-Channel IP Proprietary Telephone Activation Key (1 IP PT)
• KX-NCS4701 1-Channel SIP Extension Activation Key (1 SIP Extension)
• KX-NCS4201 1-Channel IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone Activation Key (1 IP
Softphone/IP PT)
• KX-NCS4204 4-Channel IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone Activation Key (4 IP
Softphone/IP PT)
• KX-NCS4216 16-Channel IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone Activation Key (16 IP
Softphone/IP PT)
• KX-NCS4102 2-Channel IP Trunk Activation Key (2 IP Trunk)
• KX-NCS4504 4-Channel IP Proprietary Telephone Activation Key (4 IP PT)
• KX-NCS4704 4-Channel SIP Extension Activation Key (4 SIP Extension)
• KX-NCS4708 8-Channel SIP Extension Activation Key (8 SIP Extension)
• KX-NCS4516 16-Channel IP Proprietary Telephone Activation Key (16 IP PT)

Changed Contents
• 2.1.1 Activation Keys

• 2.1.2 Activation Key Code and Key Management System

Installation Manual 285

6.1.2 PMMPR Software File Version 2.01xx

286 Installation Manual

 Index

Installation Manual 287

Index

Numerics 8-Port BRI Card (KX-TDA0288) 28, 105

8-Port Caller ID Card (KX-TDA0193) 27, 96
1-Channel IP Proprietary Telephone Activation Key
8-Port Caller ID/Pay Tone Card (KX-TDA0189) 27, 95
(KX-NCS4501) 45
8-Port DID Card (KX-TDA0182) 27, 93
1-Channel IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone Activation
8-Port Digital Extension Card (KX-TDA0171) 26, 123
Key (KX-NCS4201) 45
8-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card
1-Channel SIP Extension Activation Key
(KX-TDA0170) 26, 121
(KX-NCS4701) 45
8-Port E & M Trunk Card (KX-TDA0184) 27, 97
16-Channel Echo Canceller Card (KX-TDA0166) 26, 143
8-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card
16-Channel IP Proprietary Telephone Activation Key
(KX-TDA0173) 27, 127
(KX-NCS4516) 45
16-Channel IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone Activation
Key (KX-NCS4216) 45 A
16-Channel SIP Extension Activation Key About the software version of your PBX 15
(KX-NCS4716) 45 Activation Key 42
16-Channel VoIP DSP Card (KX-TDE0110) 26, 87 Activation Key Code 45
16-Channel VoIP Extension Card (KX-TDA0470) 28, 132 Activation Key File 43, 47
16-Channel VoIP Gateway Card (KX-TDA0490) 28, 117 Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version
16-Port Analogue Trunk Card (KX-TDA0181) 27, 91 (KX-NCS4910) 45
16-Port Digital Extension Card (KX-TDA0172) 27, 125 Activation Key, in the DSP16/DSP64 Card 42
16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card Activation Key, in the SD Memory Card 43
(KX-TDA0174) 27, 130 Activation Key, Maximum Number 42
16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card with Caller ID Amphenol Connector 73, 74
(KX-TDA0177) 27, 130 Attaching to an Amphenol Connector 72
16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension with Message Lamp Attaching to an RJ45 Connector 70
Card (KX-TDA0175) 27, 130
2-Channel IP Trunk Activation Key (KX-NCS4102) 45
2-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card B
(KX-TDA0192) 27, 145 Backup Battery Connection 61
2-Port Doorphone Card (German Type) Backup Power Supply Duration 61
(KX-TDA0162) 26, 137 Basic Shelf 23
2.4 GHz Portable Station, After Site Survey 207 Basic Shelf, Construction 23
2.4 GHz Portable Station, Before Site Survey 199 BGM 252
2.4 GHz Portable Station, Connecting a CS 208 Blank Slot Cover (KX-A258) 65
2.4 GHz Portable Station, Connection 191 BRI4 Card (KX-TDA0284) 105
2.4 GHz Portable Station, Procedure Overview 193 BRI8 Card (KX-TDA0288) 105
2.4 GHz Portable Station, Site Planning 195
2.4 GHz Portable Station, Site Survey 203
4 Cell Station Interface Card (KX-TDA0143) 26, 119 C
4-Channel IP Proprietary Telephone Activation Key Cable Distance 146
(KX-NCS4504) 45 Cable Handling 66
4-Channel IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone Activation Characteristics 31
Key (KX-NCS4204) 45 CID/PAY8 Card (KX-TDA0189) 95
4-Channel IP Trunk Activation Key (KX-NCS4104) 45 CID8 Card (KX-TDA0193) 96
4-Channel Message Card (KX-TDA0191) 27, 144 Components, System 2
4-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card Connecting Backup Batteries 62
(KX-TDA0194) 28, 145 Connection Chart for LAN Connection 255
4-Channel SIP Extension Activation Key Connection Diagram, System 24
(KX-NCS4704) 45 Connector Types 68
4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card (KX-TDA0484) 28, 115 Cover for Blank Slot 65
4-Port Analogue Trunk Card (KX-TDA0183) 27, 91 CS (for 2.4 GHz Portable Station) 208
4-Port BRI Card (KX-TDA0284) 28, 105 CS (for DECT 6.0 Portable Station) 239
4-Port Doorphone Card (KX-TDA0161) 26, 135 CS (for DECT Portable Station) 178
4-Port External Input/Output Card (KX-TDA0164) 26, 140 CSIF4 Card (KX-TDA0143) 119
64-Channel VoIP DSP Card (KX-TDE0111) 26, 87 CSIF8 Card (KX-TDA0144) 119
8 Cell Station Interface Card (KX-TDA0144) 26, 119 CSLC16 Card (KX-TDA0177) 130
8-Channel IP Proprietary Telephone Activation Key CTI Server Connection (via LAN Port) 255
(KX-NCS4508) 45 CTI—First Party Call Control 158
8-Channel IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone Activation CTI—Third Party Call Control 255
Key (KX-NCS4208) 45
8-Channel SIP Extension Activation Key
(KX-NCS4708) 45
D
8-Port Analogue Trunk Card (KX-TDA0180) 27, 91 DECT 6.0 Portable Station, After Site Survey 238
DECT 6.0 Portable Station, Before Site Survey 229

288 Installation Manual

 Index

DECT 6.0 Portable Station, Connecting a CS 239 IPCMPR Card Slot 32

DECT 6.0 Portable Station, Connection 221
DECT 6.0 Portable Station, Procedure Overview 223
DECT 6.0 Portable Station, Site Planning 225 K
DECT 6.0 Portable Station, Site Survey 234 Key Management System 45
DECT Portable Station, After Site Survey 177 KX-A258 (Blank Slot Cover) 65
DECT Portable Station, Before Site Survey 167 KX-NCS4102 (2-Channel IP Trunk Activation Key) 45
DECT Portable Station, Connecting a CS 178 KX-NCS4104 (4-Channel IP Trunk Activation Key) 45
DECT Portable Station, Connection 159 KX-NCS4201 (1-Channel IP Softphone/IP Proprietary
DECT Portable Station, Procedure Overview 161 Telephone Activation Key) 45
DECT Portable Station, RF Specification 159 KX-NCS4204 (4-Channel IP Softphone/IP Proprietary
DECT Portable Station, Site Planning 163 Telephone Activation Key) 45
DECT Portable Station, Site Survey 173 KX-NCS4208 (8-Channel IP Softphone/IP Proprietary
DHLC8 Card (KX-TDA0170) 121 Telephone Activation Key) 45
DID8 Card (KX-TDA0182) 93 KX-NCS4216 (16-Channel IP Softphone/IP Proprietary
Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection 151 Telephone Activation Key) 45
Digital XDP 151 KX-NCS4501 (1-Channel IP Proprietary Telephone Activation
Digital XDP Connection, Using a Modular Key) 45
T-Adaptor 153, 155 KX-NCS4504 (4-Channel IP Proprietary Telephone Activation
Digital XDP Connection, Using an EXtra Device Key) 45
Port 154, 156 KX-NCS4508 (8-Channel IP Proprietary Telephone Activation
DLC16 Card (KX-TDA0172) 125 Key) 45
DLC8 Card (KX-TDA0171) 123 KX-NCS4516 (16-Channel IP Proprietary Telephone
Door Opener 135, 137, 248 Activation Key) 45
Doorphone 135, 137, 248 KX-NCS4701 (1-Channel SIP Extension Activation
DPH2 Card (KX-TDA0162) 137 Key) 45
DPH4 Card (KX-TDA0161) 135 KX-NCS4704 (4-Channel SIP Extension Activation
DSP16 Card (KX-TDE0110) 87 Key) 45
DSP64 Card (KX-TDE0111) 87 KX-NCS4708 (8-Channel SIP Extension Activation
Key) 45
KX-NCS4716 (16-Channel SIP Extension Activation
E Key) 45
E&M8 Card (KX-TDA0184) 97 KX-NCS4910 (Activation Key for Software Upgrade to
E-1 Trunk Card (KX-TDA0188) 27, 102 Enhanced Version) 45
E1 Card (KX-TDA0188) 102 KX-TDA0103 (L-Type Power Supply Unit) 26, 56
ECHO16 Card (KX-TDA0166) 143 KX-TDA0104 (M-Type Power Supply Unit) 26, 56
EIO4 Card (KX-TDA0164) 140 KX-TDA0108 (S-Type Power Supply Unit) 26, 56
Error Log 281 KX-TDA0143 (4 Cell Station Interface Card) 26, 119
ESVM2 Card (KX-TDA0192) 145 KX-TDA0144 (8 Cell Station Interface Card) 26, 119
ESVM4 Card (KX-TDA0194) 145 KX-TDA0161 (4-Port Doorphone Card) 26, 135
EXT-CID Card (KX-TDA0168) 129 KX-TDA0162 (2-Port Doorphone Card [German
Extension Caller ID Card (KX-TDA0168) 26, 129 Type]) 26, 137
External Relay 140, 142, 248 KX-TDA0164 (4-Port External Input/Output Card) 26, 140
External Sensor 140, 142, 248 KX-TDA0166 (16-Channel Echo Canceller Card) 26, 143
EXtra Device Port (XDP) Mode 149, 151 KX-TDA0168 (Extension Caller ID Card) 26, 129
KX-TDA0170 (8-Port Digital Hybrid Extension
Card) 26, 121
F KX-TDA0171 (8-Port Digital Extension Card) 26, 123
Ferrite Core 70 KX-TDA0172 (16-Port Digital Extension Card) 27, 125
First Party Call Control CTI Connection 158 KX-TDA0173 (8-Port Single Line Telephone Extension
Floor Standing (KX-TDE200 Only) 79 Card) 27, 127
Frame Earth Connection 60 KX-TDA0174 (16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension
Front Cover, Closing 55 Card) 27, 130
Front Cover, Opening 54 KX-TDA0175 (16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension with
Message Lamp Card) 27, 130
KX-TDA0177 (16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card
I with Caller ID) 27, 130
Information about the Virtual Cards 90 KX-TDA0180 (8-Port Analogue Trunk Card) 27, 91
Installation Precautions 50 KX-TDA0181 (16-Port Analogue Trunk Card) 27, 91
IP Convergence Main Processing Card (IPCMPR Card) 84 KX-TDA0182 (8-Port DID Card) 27, 93
IP-EXT16 Card (KX-TDA0470) 132 KX-TDA0183 (4-Port Analogue Trunk Card) 27, 91
IP-GW16 Card (KX-TDA0490) 117 KX-TDA0184 (8-Port E & M Trunk Card) 27, 97
IP-GW4E Card (KX-TDA0484) 115 KX-TDA0187 (T-1 Trunk Card) 27, 99
IPCMPR Card 84

Installation Manual 289

Index

KX-TDA0188 (E-1 Trunk Card) 27, 102 Parallel Connection of the Extensions 148
KX-TDA0189 (8-Port Caller ID/Pay Tone Card) 27, 95 Parallel Connection, Using a Modular T-Adaptor 149
KX-TDA0190 (Optional 3-Slot Base Card) 27, 134 Parallel Connection, Using an EXtra Device Port 149
KX-TDA0191 (4-Channel Message Card) 27, 144 Parallel Mode 149, 151
KX-TDA0192 (2-Channel Simplified Voice Message Password Security 268
Card) 27, 145 PC Connection (via MNT Port) 251
KX-TDA0193 (8-Port Caller ID Card) 27, 96 PC Connection (via RS-232C) 252
KX-TDA0194 (4-Channel Simplified Voice Message Power Failure Connections 256
Card) 28, 145 Power Supply Unit 56
KX-TDA0196 (Remote Card) 28, 89 Power Supply Unit Selection 38
KX-TDA0284 (4-Port BRI Card) 28, 105 Power Supply Unit, Installation 57
KX-TDA0288 (8-Port BRI Card) 28, 105 Power Supply Unit, Replacement 58
KX-TDA0290 (PRI Card [PRI23]) 28, 112 PRI Card (PRI23) (KX-TDA0290) 28, 112
KX-TDA0290CE (PRI Card [PRI30]) 28, 109 PRI Card (PRI30) (KX-TDA0290CE) 28, 109
KX-TDA0290CJ (PRI Card [PRI30]) 28, 109 PRI Card (PRI30) (KX-TDA0290CJ) 28, 109
KX-TDA0470 (16-Channel VoIP Extension Card) 28, 132 PRI23 Card (KX-TDA0290) 112
KX-TDA0484 (4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card) 28, 115 PRI30 Card (KX-TDA0290CE) 109
KX-TDA0490 (16-Channel VoIP Gateway Card) 28, 117 PRI30 Card (KX-TDA0290CJ) 109
KX-TDE0110 (16-Channel VoIP DSP Card) 26, 87 Printer Connection (via RS-232C) 252
KX-TDE0111 (64-Channel VoIP DSP Card) 26, 87 PSU 56
PSU Capacity 39
PSU-L 38, 56
L PSU-M 38, 56
L-Type Power Supply Unit (KX-TDA0103) 26, 56 PSU-S 38, 56
LCOT16 Card (KX-TDA0181) 91
LCOT4 Card (KX-TDA0183) 91
LCOT8 Card (KX-TDA0180) 91 Q
LED Indications, PBX 261 Quick Setup 268
Load Figure Calculation 38
R
M Remote Card (KX-TDA0196) 28, 89
M-Type Power Supply Unit (KX-TDA0104) 26, 56 Reset Button 280
Maintenance Console 264 RF Specification, DECT 6.0 Portable Station 222
Maintenance Console, Installation 268 RF Specification, DECT Portable Station 159
Maintenance Console, Overview 264 RMT Card (KX-TDA0196) 89
Maintenance Console, Password Security 268 RUN Indicator 260
Maintenance Console, PC Connection 265
Maintenance Console, Quick Setup 268
Maintenance Console, System Requirements 268 S
Master DPT, Digital XDP 151 S-Type Power Supply Unit (KX-TDA0108) 26, 56
Maximum Terminal Equipment 37 Safety Installation Instructions 50
MOH 252 Safety Instructions 56
MSG4 Card (KX-TDA0191) 144 SD Memory Card 84
MSLC16 Card (KX-TDA0175) 130 Site Planning, 2.4 GHz Portable Station 195
Site Planning, DECT 6.0 Portable Station 225
Site Planning, DECT Portable Station 163
N Site Survey, 2.4 GHz Portable Station 203
Names and Locations 53 Site Survey, DECT 6.0 Portable Station 234
Site Survey, DECT Portable Station 173
Slave DPT, Digital XDP 151
O SLC16 Card (KX-TDA0174) 130
OPB3 Card (KX-TDA0190) 134 SLC8 Card (KX-TDA0173) 127
Optional 3-Slot Base Card (KX-TDA0190) 27, 134 Slot for the IPCMPR Card 32
Optional Equipment 26 Slots for Physical Cards (Free Slots) 32
Optional Service Card, Installation 63 Slots for Virtual Extension Cards 32
Optional Service Card, Maximum Number 32 Slots for Virtual Trunk Cards 32
Optional Service Card, Removal 67 Specifications 29
Specifications, Characteristics 31
Specifications, General Description 29
P Specifications, System Capacity 32
Pager 252 Starting the PBX 260
Panasonic Proprietary Telephones, Compatible 5 Surge Protector Installation 81
Panasonic Proprietary Telephones, Incompatible 5 System Capacity 32

290 Installation Manual

 Index

System Components Table 2

System Connection Diagram 24
System Highlights 20
System Initialisation Procedure 260
System Initialise Switch 260, 280
System Requirements 268

T
T-1 Trunk Card (KX-TDA0187) 27, 99
T1 Card (KX-TDA0187) 99
Terminal Equipment, Maximum Number 37
Troubleshooting, by Error Log 281
Troubleshooting, Connection 275
Troubleshooting, Installation 272
Troubleshooting, Operation 277
Troubleshooting, Using the Reset Button 280
Trunk Connection 261

U
Unpacking 52

V
V-IPEXT32 (Virtual 32-Channel VoIP Extension Card) 90
V-IPGW16 (Virtual 16-Channel VoIP Gateway Card) 90
V-SIPEXT32 (Virtual 32-Channel SIP Extension Card) 90
Virtual 16-Channel VoIP Gateway Card (V-IPGW16) 90
Virtual 32-Channel SIP Extension Card (V-SIPEXT32) 90
Virtual 32-Channel VoIP Extension Card (V-IPEXT32) 90
Virtual Cards 90
Virtual Extension Slot 32
Virtual Trunk Slot 32

W
Wall Mounting (CS) 187, 216
Wall Mounting (KX-TDE100) 77
Wall Mounting (KX-TDE200) 75
Wiring Precautions 50

Installation Manual 291

 The KX-TDE100UK/KX-TDE200UK, the KX-TDE100NE/KX-TDE200NE, the KX-TDE100GR/KX-TDE200GR,
and the KX-TDE100CE/KX-TDE200CE are designed to interwork with the:
• Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) of European countries
• Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN basic rate access
• Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN primary rate
access
• ONP 2048 kbit/s digital structured leased lines (D2048S)

Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd./Panasonic Communications Company (U.K.) Ltd. declares that this equipment is in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Radio & Telecommunications Terminal
Equipment (R&TTE) Directive 1999/5/EC.
Declarations of Conformity for the relevant Panasonic products described in this manual are available for download by
visiting:

http://www.doc.panasonic.de

Contact to Authorised Representative:

Panasonic Testing Centre
Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany
 Notes

Installation Manual 293

For Future Reference
Please print, record, and retain the following information for future reference.

Note
The serial number of this product can be found on the label affixed to the unit. You should record
the model number and the serial number of this unit as a permanent record of your purchase to
aid in identification in the event of theft.

MODEL NO.

SERIAL NO.

DATE OF PURCHASE

NAME OF DEALER

DEALER'S ADDRESS

DEALER'S TEL. NO.

1-62, 4-chome, Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan

Copyright:
This material is copyrighted by Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd., and may be reproduced for internal use
only. All other reproduction, in whole or in part, is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic
Communications Co., Ltd.

Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. 2007

PSQX4187VA KK0607EK4108